Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 488

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing

Fundamentals Ed 1
Volume 2 - Student Guide

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
D49483GC10

n a e
r
Edition 1.0
August 2007

t e U s
D51799

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and
print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way.
Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display,
perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization
of Oracle.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please
report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
warranted to be error-free.

Restricted Rights Notice

If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United
States Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS


The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted
by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

Trademark Notice

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective
owners.

Author

John Salvini
m y
Technical Contributors and Reviewers
d e
Rajeshwari Chellam, James Devine, Sripriya Gopal, Carolyn Graver, Jean-Francois Guerrini,
Vivian Y. Lee, Yuko Saito, Wei Si, Nancy Szeto
c a
e A
This book was published using:

c l oracletutor

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Table of Contents

Overview of Advanced Pricing .......................................................................................................................1-1


Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing..........................................................................................................1-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4
Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing..........................................................................................................1-5
Benefits of Oracle Advanced Pricing ............................................................................................................1-10
Oracle Advanced Pricing Related Products...................................................................................................1-11
Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing in the Order to Cash Process............................................................1-12
Pricing in Order Fulfillment ..........................................................................................................................1-13
TCA Party Hierarchy.....................................................................................................................................1-14
Single Pricing Engine – Multiple Uses of Pricing Data.................................................................................1-15
Pricing Engine Overview...............................................................................................................................1-16
Overview of the Pricing Engine ....................................................................................................................1-18
Pricing Engine ...............................................................................................................................................1-19
Pricing Engine Process ..................................................................................................................................1-21
The Oracle Advanced Pricing Process...........................................................................................................1-23
Oracle Advanced Pricing Features ................................................................................................................1-24
Price Lists ......................................................................................................................................................1-25
Qualifiers .......................................................................................................................................................1-26
Qualifier Groups ............................................................................................................................................1-27
Modifiers .......................................................................................................................................................1-28
Accruals.........................................................................................................................................................1-30

Price Books....................................................................................................................................................1-33

m y
Formulas ........................................................................................................................................................1-31

Contexts.........................................................................................................................................................1-34

d e
Pricing Attributes...........................................................................................................................................1-35
Attribute Management...................................................................................................................................1-36

c a
Responsibility Levels ....................................................................................................................................1-37
Oracle Pricing Administrator.........................................................................................................................1-38
Oracle Pricing Manager.................................................................................................................................1-39

e A
Oracle Pricing User .......................................................................................................................................1-40
Oracle Advanced Pricing HTML User Interface (UI) ...................................................................................1-41

c l
Pricing Home Page (HTML UI) ....................................................................................................................1-42
Modifier Setup (HTML UI)...........................................................................................................................1-43

r a
Shortcut Region (HTML Home page) ...........................................................................................................1-45
Summary........................................................................................................................................................1-46

O ly
Generic Implementation Setup.......................................................................................................................2-1

& On
Generic Implementation Setup ......................................................................................................................2-3

l
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2-4

a e
Overview of Main Pricing Implementation Steps .........................................................................................2-5
Perform System Administration Steps...........................................................................................................2-8

r n
Set Profile Options.........................................................................................................................................2-9

s
e
Set Multicurrency Profile Options.................................................................................................................2-10

I n t U
Verify or Create Pricing Transaction Entity ..................................................................................................2-11
Create Qualifier Contexts and Qualifier Attributes .......................................................................................2-12
Create Pricing Contexts, Pricing Attributes, and Product Attributes.............................................................2-13

e
Perform Attribute Management.....................................................................................................................2-14

l
Define Unit of Measure .................................................................................................................................2-15

c
Define Unit of Measure Conversions ............................................................................................................2-16

r a
Create Item Relationships..............................................................................................................................2-17
Define Pricing Lookups.................................................................................................................................2-18

O Enable Currencies..........................................................................................................................................2-19
Create Events and Phases ..............................................................................................................................2-20

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


i
Verify Pricing Parameter Settings .................................................................................................................2-22
Set up Pricing Security ..................................................................................................................................2-23
Related Setup Steps .......................................................................................................................................2-24
Define Item Information ................................................................................................................................2-25
Define Item Category Sets and Item Categories............................................................................................2-26
Set Up Inventory Organization......................................................................................................................2-28
Define Oracle Order Management Lookups..................................................................................................2-29
Define Shipping Lookups ..............................................................................................................................2-30
Set Up Customer Class and Profile Class......................................................................................................2-31
Define Customers and Customer Sites ..........................................................................................................2-32
Define Transaction Types..............................................................................................................................2-33
Define Freight Terms.....................................................................................................................................2-34
Define Freight Cost Type ..............................................................................................................................2-35
Define Payment Terms ..................................................................................................................................2-36
Oracle Advanced Pricing Concepts ...............................................................................................................2-37
Pricing Rules .................................................................................................................................................2-38
Pricing Actions ..............................................................................................................................................2-39
Pricing Controls.............................................................................................................................................2-40
Pricing Extensibility ......................................................................................................................................2-41
Attribute Mapping .........................................................................................................................................2-42
APIs ...............................................................................................................................................................2-43
Basic Flow of Pricing ....................................................................................................................................2-44
Methodology Steps ........................................................................................................................................2-45
Analyzing Pricing Needs ...............................................................................................................................2-46
Developing Pricing Solutions ........................................................................................................................2-49
Single or Multiple Currency Price Lists ........................................................................................................2-50
Customer and Product Hierarchies ................................................................................................................2-52
Customer Hierarchy.......................................................................................................................................2-54
m y
e
Trading Community Architecture (TCA) Attributes .....................................................................................2-56

d
Item Categories and Category Sets................................................................................................................2-57
Pricing Attributes...........................................................................................................................................2-58

c a
Structuring Your Pricing Rules and Actions .................................................................................................2-60
Establishing Pricing Controls ........................................................................................................................2-61

A
Defining Unit of Measure..............................................................................................................................2-63
Defining Unit of Measure Conversions .........................................................................................................2-64

e
c l
Adjusting UOM Setups for Oracle Advanced Pricing...................................................................................2-65
Primary UOM Versus Pricing UOM .............................................................................................................2-66

r a
Multiple Organizations and Pricing Actions..................................................................................................2-68
Using Qualifiers with Multiple Organizations...............................................................................................2-69

O ly
Pricing Security, MOAC, and Operating Units .............................................................................................2-70
QP: Item Validation Organization .................................................................................................................2-71

l & On
Cross Order Volume Loader..........................................................................................................................2-72
Testing Your Pricing Solutions .....................................................................................................................2-74

a e
Selected Oracle Advanced Pricing Lookups..................................................................................................2-75

n
Agreement Type ............................................................................................................................................2-76

r s
Arithmetic Operator.......................................................................................................................................2-77

e
Comparison Operator ....................................................................................................................................2-79

t U
Currency Precision Type ...............................................................................................................................2-80

I n
Effective Date Types .....................................................................................................................................2-81
Incompatibility Groups..................................................................................................................................2-82

e
Incompatibility Resolution Code...................................................................................................................2-83

l
List Line Type Code ......................................................................................................................................2-84

c
List Type Code ..............................................................................................................................................2-87

r a
Modifier Level Code .....................................................................................................................................2-89
Price Break Type Code..................................................................................................................................2-90

O Price Formula Line Type Code......................................................................................................................2-91


Pricing Events................................................................................................................................................2-93

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


ii
Pricing Group Sequence ................................................................................................................................2-94
Related Modifier Group Type .......................................................................................................................2-95
Request Type .................................................................................................................................................2-96
Source System ...............................................................................................................................................2-98
Profile Options...............................................................................................................................................2-99
Order Management Profile Options for Oracle Advanced Pricing................................................................2-100
Oracle Advanced Pricing Profile Options .....................................................................................................2-101
Practice - Setting Up Required Data for Pricing Practices ........................................................................2-106
Summary........................................................................................................................................................2-110
Price Lists .........................................................................................................................................................3-1
Price Lists ......................................................................................................................................................3-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................3-4
Overview of Price Lists .................................................................................................................................3-6
Price List Information....................................................................................................................................3-8
Multicurrency Conversion Lists ....................................................................................................................3-11
Practice - Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List ................................................................................3-12
Solution - Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List................................................................................3-13
Creating Price Lists .......................................................................................................................................3-15
Create List: General Information...................................................................................................................3-19
Secondary Price List......................................................................................................................................3-21
Secondary Price List Region: Precedence .....................................................................................................3-22
QP: Qualify Secondary Price Lists ................................................................................................................3-24
Create List: List Qualifier..............................................................................................................................3-25
Create List: Review .......................................................................................................................................3-27
Practice - Creating a Price List ..................................................................................................................3-29
Solution - Creating a Price List..................................................................................................................3-31
Practice - Applying a Multicurrency Conversion Price List to a Sales Order ...........................................3-37
Solution - Applying a Multicurrency Conversion Price List to a Sales Order...........................................3-38
m y
Practice - Entering a Sales Order Using Multiple Price Lists ....................................................................3-40
Solution - Entering a Sales Order Using Multiple Price Lists ...................................................................3-41
d e
c a
Adding Price List Lines (HTML UI).............................................................................................................3-43
Price List Lines..............................................................................................................................................3-44

A
Default UOM for Price Lists .........................................................................................................................3-46
List Line Information.....................................................................................................................................3-47

e
Price List Line Values ...................................................................................................................................3-49

l
Overview of Price Breaks..............................................................................................................................3-51

c
Types of Price Breaks....................................................................................................................................3-52

r a
Price Break Example .....................................................................................................................................3-53
Block Pricing .................................................................................................................................................3-55

O ly
Usage Proration of Price Breaks....................................................................................................................3-56
Usage Modification - Proration Dependencies and Interactions...................................................................3-60

l & On
Practice - Creating Point and Range Price Breaks for Price List Items .....................................................3-61
Solution - Creating Point and Range Price Breaks for Price List Items ....................................................3-64

n a e
Price List Maintenance Feature .....................................................................................................................3-70
Practice - Finding and Changing Price Lists Using Price List Maintenance .............................................3-71

t e r U s
Solution - Finding and Changing Price Lists Using Price List Maintenance.............................................3-73
Overview of Multicurrency Conversion Lists ...............................................................................................3-77

n
Multicurrency Conversion Lists ....................................................................................................................3-79

I
Attributes .......................................................................................................................................................3-82
Markup and Conversion Formulas ................................................................................................................3-83

e
c l
Implementation Decisions for Creating Multicurrency Conversion Lists .....................................................3-84
Combining Price Lists ...................................................................................................................................3-86

r a
Rounding .......................................................................................................................................................3-88
Rounding Behavior During Currency Conversion Calculations: Non-Service Items....................................3-89

O
Rounding Behavior During Currency Conversion Calculations: Service Items............................................3-90
QP: Selling Price Rounding Options = Individual.........................................................................................3-91

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


iii
QP: Selling Price Rounding Options = N (No)..............................................................................................3-92
Profile: QP Multi-Currency Installed ............................................................................................................3-93
Using Conversion Types ...............................................................................................................................3-95
Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List ....................................................................................................3-97
Example of Using Precedence in a Multicurrency Conversion List ..............................................................3-99
Attaching Multicurrency Conversion Lists to Price Lists and Agreements...................................................3-100
How Multicurrency Changes Price Lists and Agreements ............................................................................3-102
Upgrading from Single Currency to Multicurrency Price Lists.....................................................................3-104
Using Multicurrency Price Lists with Other Oracle Products .......................................................................3-106
Maintaining Price Lists..................................................................................................................................3-107
Copying Price Lists .......................................................................................................................................3-108
Practice - Copying a Price List ..................................................................................................................3-109
Solution - Copying a Price List..................................................................................................................3-110
Copying Price List Lines ...............................................................................................................................3-112
Adding Inventory Items to Price Lists...........................................................................................................3-113
Practice - Adding an Item Category to a Price List ...................................................................................3-114
Solution - Adding an Item Category to a Price List...................................................................................3-116
Adding Items to Price Lists ...........................................................................................................................3-119
Updating Prices Manually for Price List Lines..............................................................................................3-121
Adjusting Price Lists .....................................................................................................................................3-122
Practice - Adjusting a Price List ................................................................................................................3-123
Solution - Adjusting a Price List................................................................................................................3-124
OM: Allow Negative Pricing.........................................................................................................................3-128
Querying Price List Lines..............................................................................................................................3-129
Deleting Price List Information .....................................................................................................................3-130
Bulk Uploading of Price Lists .......................................................................................................................3-131
Bulk Loader for Price List Concurrent Program............................................................................................3-132
Setting up Bulk Loader for Price List Step 1: Loading Data ........................................................................3-133
m y
e
Setting up Bulk Loader for Price List Step 2: Pre-Processing Steps ............................................................3-135

d
Setting up Bulk Loader for Price List Step 3: Importing Data .....................................................................3-136
Bulk Loader Processing.................................................................................................................................3-137

c a
Bulk Loader: Profile Options.........................................................................................................................3-138
Overview of Agreements...............................................................................................................................3-140

A
Creating Agreements .....................................................................................................................................3-143
Types of Agreements.....................................................................................................................................3-145

e
c l
Standard Price List.........................................................................................................................................3-146
Agreement Price List .....................................................................................................................................3-147

r a
Merging Customers .......................................................................................................................................3-148
Creating Agreements .....................................................................................................................................3-149

O ly
Creating Agreement Lines for Standard Price Lists ......................................................................................3-151
Creating Agreement Lines for Agreement Price Lists...................................................................................3-152

l & On
Creating Agreement Lines.............................................................................................................................3-153
Defining Pricing Attributes............................................................................................................................3-155

a e
Defining Price Breaks for Agreements..........................................................................................................3-156

n
Revising Existing Agreements ......................................................................................................................3-157

r s
Deleting Agreements .....................................................................................................................................3-160

e
Overview of General Services Administration (GSA) Pricing ......................................................................3-161

t U
What is GSA? ................................................................................................................................................3-162

I n
Creating GSA Price Lists ..............................................................................................................................3-163
Practice - Defining a GSA Price List and Entering a Sales Order .............................................................3-165

e
Solution - Defining a GSA Price List and Entering a Sales Order ............................................................3-168

l
Creating GSA List Qualifiers ........................................................................................................................3-172

c
Sales Agreements ..........................................................................................................................................3-174

r a
Summary........................................................................................................................................................3-176

O
Formulas...........................................................................................................................................................4-1
Formulas ........................................................................................................................................................4-3

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


iv
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................4-4
Overview of Formulas ...................................................................................................................................4-5
Pricing Formula Example ..............................................................................................................................4-6
Creating Pricing Formulas.............................................................................................................................4-8
Creating Pricing Formula Lines.....................................................................................................................4-9
Pricing Formulas ...........................................................................................................................................4-11
Formula Line Types.......................................................................................................................................4-13
Formula Type: Function ................................................................................................................................4-17
Formula Type: List Price ...............................................................................................................................4-18
Formula Type: Factor List .............................................................................................................................4-19
Formula Type: Factor List Example..............................................................................................................4-21
Finding Formula Factor Lines .......................................................................................................................4-22
Formula Type: Modifier Value......................................................................................................................4-23
Formula Type: Numeric Constant .................................................................................................................4-24
Formula Type: Price List Line.......................................................................................................................4-25
Formula Type: Pricing Attribute ...................................................................................................................4-26
Advanced Pricing-Pricing Formulas window................................................................................................4-27
Build Formula Package .................................................................................................................................4-28
Practice - Creating a Simple Pricing Formula ...........................................................................................4-29
Solution - Creating a Simple Pricing Formula...........................................................................................4-31
Practice - Creating a Sales Order Using a Simple Pricing Formula...........................................................4-36
Solution - Creating a Sales Order Using a Simple Pricing Formula..........................................................4-37
Get_Custom_Price API .................................................................................................................................4-40
GET_CUSTOM_PRICE Example ................................................................................................................4-41
Customizing GET_CUSTOM_PRICE ..........................................................................................................4-43
Using GET_CUSTOM_PRICE .....................................................................................................................4-44
GET_CUSTOM_PRICE Parameters.............................................................................................................4-45
Implementing Get Custom Price ...................................................................................................................4-46
m y
e
Linking Formulas To Modifier or Price List Lines .......................................................................................4-48

d
Types of Formula Processing ........................................................................................................................4-50
Static Formula Processing .............................................................................................................................4-51

c a
Dynamic Formula Processing........................................................................................................................4-52
Null Values in Formulas................................................................................................................................4-53

A
Null Values Example.....................................................................................................................................4-54
Formula Step Values Window.......................................................................................................................4-56

e
c l
Using the Formula Step Values Window ......................................................................................................4-58
Updating Formula Prices Window ................................................................................................................4-60

r a
Seeded Freight and Special Charge Formulas ...............................................................................................4-62
Setting up Formula Profile Options ...............................................................................................................4-64

O ly
Formula Scenario 1........................................................................................................................................4-66
Formula Scenario 2........................................................................................................................................4-70

l & On
Summary........................................................................................................................................................4-73
Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups ....................................................................................................................5-1

n a e
Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups ....................................................................................................................5-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................5-4

t e r U s
Overview of Qualifiers ..................................................................................................................................5-6
Creating Qualifiers for Price Lists or Modifiers ............................................................................................5-8

n
Creating List Qualifiers in Creation Flow (HTML UI) ................................................................................5-9

I
Creating Line Qualifiers in Creation Flow (HTML UI) ................................................................................5-10
Typical Qualifier Setup (HTML UI) .............................................................................................................5-11

e
c l
Qualifier Terminology...................................................................................................................................5-12
Example of Qualifier Hierarchy ....................................................................................................................5-13

r a
Qualifiers (HTML UI) ...................................................................................................................................5-14
Unique Qualifiers (HTML UI) ......................................................................................................................5-15

O
Common Qualifiers (HTML UI) ...................................................................................................................5-16
Applies To Party Hierarchy check box..........................................................................................................5-17

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


v
Creating Qualifier Groups .............................................................................................................................5-18
Forms UI: Qualifier Grouping Number .........................................................................................................5-19
Practice - Creating a Qualifier Group ........................................................................................................5-21
Solution - Creating a Qualifier Group .......................................................................................................5-23
Appending Qualifier Groups .........................................................................................................................5-25
Qualifier Grouping Number (Forms UI) .......................................................................................................5-26
Selected Qualifier Groups..............................................................................................................................5-27
Appending Qualifier Groups (Forms UI) ......................................................................................................5-28
Retaining Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups................................................................................5-29
Generating Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups.................................................................5-30
Summary........................................................................................................................................................5-31
Modifiers ..........................................................................................................................................................6-1
Modifiers .......................................................................................................................................................6-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................6-4
Overview of Modifiers ..................................................................................................................................6-6
Modifiers in Business Scenario Process ........................................................................................................6-7
Pricing Concept: Modifiers............................................................................................................................6-8
Examples of Modifier Use.............................................................................................................................6-9
Example of Surcharge Modifier ....................................................................................................................6-10
Modifier Components....................................................................................................................................6-11
Modifier Setup...............................................................................................................................................6-12
Modifier Setup (HTML UI)...........................................................................................................................6-13
Create Modifier List Flow (HTML UI) .........................................................................................................6-14
Types of Modifier Lists .................................................................................................................................6-15
Create List: General Information...................................................................................................................6-16

Using ANY Currency ....................................................................................................................................6-18


Advantages of Using ANY Currency Modifier .............................................................................................6-20
m y
Currency ........................................................................................................................................................6-17

d e
Create List: List Qualifier..............................................................................................................................6-21
List Qualifier: Effective Dates.......................................................................................................................6-23

c a
Create List: Review .......................................................................................................................................6-24
Adding Modifier Lines ..................................................................................................................................6-25

A
Modifier List and Line Type Relationships ...................................................................................................6-26
Create Modifier Line Flow (HTML UI) ........................................................................................................6-28

e
Modifier Line Types......................................................................................................................................6-30

l
Discount Modifier..........................................................................................................................................6-32

c
Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group ............................................................6-33

r a
Solution - Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group............................................................6-36
Surcharge Modifier........................................................................................................................................6-42

O ly
Practice - Creating a Surcharge Modifier ..................................................................................................6-43
Solution - Creating a Surcharge Modifier..................................................................................................6-46

l & On
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier .....................................................................................................6-53
Practice - Creating a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier ................................................................6-55

n a e
Solution - Creating a Freight and Handling Charges Modifier..................................................................6-60
Promotional Goods Modifier.........................................................................................................................6-76

t e r U s
Practice - Creating a Promotional Goods (Free Good) Modifier ...............................................................6-77
Solution - Creating a Promotional Goods (Free Good) Modifier ..............................................................6-80

n
Term Substitution Modifier ...........................................................................................................................6-88

I
Practice - Creating a Term Substitution Modifier......................................................................................6-89
Solution - Creating a Terms Substitution Modifier ...................................................................................6-92

e
c l
Item Upgrade Modifier..................................................................................................................................6-98
Implementation Considerations: Item Upgrade Modifier..............................................................................6-99

r aPractice - Creating an Item Upgrade Modifier...........................................................................................6-100


Solution - Creating an Item Upgrade Modifier..........................................................................................6-103

O
Other Item Discount Modifier .......................................................................................................................6-111
Practice - Creating an Other Item Modifier ...............................................................................................6-112

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


vi
Solution - Creating an Other Item Modifier ..............................................................................................6-115
Coupon Issue Modifier ..................................................................................................................................6-122
Practice - Setting up Automatic Coupon Issue and the Related Benefit....................................................6-123
Solution - Setting up Automatic Coupon Issue and the Related Benefit ...................................................6-128
Price Breaks Modifier....................................................................................................................................6-140
Practice - Creating a Modifier with Point and Range Breaks ....................................................................6-141
Solution - Creating a Modifier with Point and Range Breaks ...................................................................6-146
Practice - Creating a Price Break Modifier Using an Item Category.........................................................6-159
Solution - Creating a Price Break Modifier Using an Item Category ........................................................6-162
Price Break Modifiers: Point Breaks .............................................................................................................6-171
Price Break Modifiers: Range Breaks ...........................................................................................................6-172
Price Breaks: Net Amount Calculation..........................................................................................................6-173
Price Breaks: Net Amount Example..............................................................................................................6-174
Accumulated Range Breaks...........................................................................................................................6-176
Modifier Line: Start/End Dates .....................................................................................................................6-179
Pricing Controls.............................................................................................................................................6-181
Controls: Implementation Considerations .....................................................................................................6-182
How Pricing Engine Processes Pricing Controls ...........................................................................................6-183
Controls: Modifier Level ...............................................................................................................................6-184
Controls: Pricing Phase .................................................................................................................................6-185
Pricing Phases................................................................................................................................................6-186
Pricing Events................................................................................................................................................6-188
Seeded Phases Example.................................................................................................................................6-189
Phase and Event Implementation Decision ...................................................................................................6-190
Event Phases..................................................................................................................................................6-191
Event Phases: Line Event ..............................................................................................................................6-192
Event Phases: Order Event ............................................................................................................................6-193
Event Phases: Book and Ship Events ............................................................................................................6-194
m y
e
Event Phases: Batch Event ............................................................................................................................6-195

d
Controls: Buckets ..........................................................................................................................................6-196
Buckets: Implementation Considerations ......................................................................................................6-198

c a
Null Buckets ..................................................................................................................................................6-200
Buckets For Manual Modifiers......................................................................................................................6-201

A
Practice - Creating Modifier Lines with Multiple Buckets........................................................................6-202
Solution - Creating Modifier Lines with Multiple Buckets .......................................................................6-205

e
c l
Practice - Creating a Manual Overrideable Discount ................................................................................6-213
Solution - Creating a Manual Overrideable Discount................................................................................6-216

r a
Cascading Modifier: Single Bucket...............................................................................................................6-222
Cascading Modifier: Multiple Buckets..........................................................................................................6-223

O ly
Controls: Incompatibility...............................................................................................................................6-224
Controls: Incompatibility Groups Implementation Decisions .......................................................................6-225

l & On
Controls: Determining Incompatibility Groups .............................................................................................6-226
Cascading Modifier Example – Incompatibility Levels ................................................................................6-227

a e
Practice - Resolving Group Modifier Incompatibilities.............................................................................6-228

n
Solution - Resolving Group Modifier Incompatibilities ............................................................................6-230

r s
Controls: Resolving Modifier Incompatibility...............................................................................................6-235

e
Best Price.......................................................................................................................................................6-236

t U
Exclusivity: Implementation Considerations.................................................................................................6-238

I n
Exclusivity.....................................................................................................................................................6-239
Create Product ...............................................................................................................................................6-240

e
Define Product...............................................................................................................................................6-241

l
Product: Excluded Products...........................................................................................................................6-242

c
Precedence Value ..........................................................................................................................................6-243

r a
Precedence Number.......................................................................................................................................6-244
Define Benefit ...............................................................................................................................................6-245

O Modifier Adjustment Methods ......................................................................................................................6-246


Modifier Implementation Considerations: Accruals......................................................................................6-247

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


vii
Overview of Promotional Limits ...................................................................................................................6-249
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)........................................................................................................................6-250
Other Attributes .............................................................................................................................................6-255
Actions to Control Exceeded Limits..............................................................................................................6-256
Hard Limit .....................................................................................................................................................6-257
Soft Limit.......................................................................................................................................................6-258
Limits: Viewing Transactions........................................................................................................................6-259
Limits: Exceptions.........................................................................................................................................6-260
Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Promotional Limits..........................................................6-261
Solution - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Promotional Limits .........................................................6-264
Pricing Organizer...........................................................................................................................................6-270
Practice - Finding and Reviewing Modifiers Using the Pricing Organizer ...............................................6-271
Solution - Finding and Reviewing Modifiers Using the Pricing Organizer...............................................6-272
Summary........................................................................................................................................................6-274
Price Books.......................................................................................................................................................7-1
Price Books....................................................................................................................................................7-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................7-4
Overview of Price Books...............................................................................................................................7-5
Types of Price Books.....................................................................................................................................7-8
Price Book Example 1 ...................................................................................................................................7-9
Price Book Example 2 ...................................................................................................................................7-10
Price Book Example 3 ...................................................................................................................................7-11
Benefits of Price Books .................................................................................................................................7-12
Price Book Implementation ...........................................................................................................................7-13
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options.....................................................................................7-14
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options......................................................................................7-17
Implementation Steps: Verifying Pricing Parameters....................................................................................7-18
Implementation Steps: Setting Up the Default Printer...................................................................................7-20
m y
Implementation Steps: Setting up Oracle XML Publisher.............................................................................7-21
Implementation Steps: Setting up XML Gateway Message Map..................................................................7-22
d e
GET_CATALOG_002 XML Message..........................................................................................................7-23

c
SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML message .......................................................................................................7-24
a
A
Price Book Public APIs .................................................................................................................................7-25
Create Price Book API ..................................................................................................................................7-26

e
Get Price Book API .......................................................................................................................................7-27

l
Creating a Price Book....................................................................................................................................7-28

c
Creating a Price Book: Defining General Price Book Criteria .....................................................................7-29

r a
Creating a Price Book: Defining Price Calculation Criteria .........................................................................7-30
Creating a Price Book: Selecting Price Book Publishing Options................................................................7-31

O ly
Price Book Publishing Templates..................................................................................................................7-32
Price Book Publishing: Document Types......................................................................................................7-33

l & On
Generating and Publishing Price Books ........................................................................................................7-34
Practice - Creating a Price Book................................................................................................................7-35

n a e
Solution - Creating a Price Book ...............................................................................................................7-37
Viewing Price Book Details Online ..............................................................................................................7-42

t e r U s
Creating a Delta Price Book ..........................................................................................................................7-44
Practice - Creating a Delta Price Book ......................................................................................................7-45

n
Solution - Creating a Delta Price Book......................................................................................................7-47

I
Maintaining Price Books ...............................................................................................................................7-52
Republishing Price Books..............................................................................................................................7-53

e
c l
Viewing Errors ..............................................................................................................................................7-54
Summary........................................................................................................................................................7-55

r a
Attribute Management....................................................................................................................................8-1
Attribute Management...................................................................................................................................8-3

O Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................8-4
What Is Attribute Management?....................................................................................................................8-5

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


viii
Attribute Management Features ....................................................................................................................8-6
Process Flow for Creating Contexts and Attributes.......................................................................................8-7
Common Terms .............................................................................................................................................8-8
What Is a Context? ........................................................................................................................................8-10
Understanding Contexts ................................................................................................................................8-11
Contexts.........................................................................................................................................................8-12
Qualifier Contexts..........................................................................................................................................8-14
Qualifier Context Examples ..........................................................................................................................8-15
Product Contexts............................................................................................................................................8-16
Attributes for Contexts ..................................................................................................................................8-17
How Can Attributes Control Pricing Actions? ..............................................................................................8-18
Attributes in Advanced Pricing .....................................................................................................................8-19
Creating Attributes for Contexts....................................................................................................................8-20
Attribute Selection: Pricing Engine Processing.............................................................................................8-21
Pricing Attributes...........................................................................................................................................8-22
Restoring Context and Attribute Defaults .....................................................................................................8-25
Pricing Attributes and Flexfields ...................................................................................................................8-27
Stages in Attribute Creation...........................................................................................................................8-28
Linking Attributes to a Pricing Transaction Entity........................................................................................8-29
Selecting Attribute Options ...........................................................................................................................8-31
Attribute Levels .............................................................................................................................................8-33
Attribute Levels .............................................................................................................................................8-35
LOV Enabled: Pricing windows....................................................................................................................8-36
Disabling an Attribute from a PTE ................................................................................................................8-37
Attribute Mapping Methods ..........................................................................................................................8-38
When Attribute Mapping Method is Selected ...............................................................................................8-40
Setting Up a New Mapping Rule for a Qualifier or Pricing Attribute ...........................................................8-42
Practice - Creating a Formula Using Pricing Attributes and Factors.........................................................8-43
m y
e
Solution - Creating a Formula Using Pricing Attributes and Factors ........................................................8-50

d
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program.......................................................................................................8-64
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program Checklist.......................................................................................8-66

c a
Overview of Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE) .............................................................................................8-68
Seeded PTEs..................................................................................................................................................8-70

A
Role of PTEs in Attribute Management ........................................................................................................8-71
Components of a Pricing Transaction Entity .................................................................................................8-72

e
c l
Source Systems..............................................................................................................................................8-74
Seeded Source Systems .................................................................................................................................8-75

r a
Functional Areas for Source System Region .................................................................................................8-76
Request Types ...............................................................................................................................................8-77

O ly
Request Type and PTE Parameters................................................................................................................8-78
Creating a New Pricing Transaction Entity ...................................................................................................8-79

l & On
Defining Pricing Transaction Entity Associations.........................................................................................8-81
QP: Source System Code...............................................................................................................................8-82

a e
QP: Source System Code Example................................................................................................................8-86

n
Summary........................................................................................................................................................8-87

t e r U s
Pricing Security ...............................................................................................................................................9-1
Pricing Security .............................................................................................................................................9-3

n
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................9-4

I
Overview of Pricing Security ........................................................................................................................9-5
Oracle Pricing Administrator.........................................................................................................................9-7

e
c l
Levels of Pricing Security .............................................................................................................................9-8
Functional Security........................................................................................................................................9-10

r a
PTE + Source System Code level Security....................................................................................................9-11
Setting up Pricing Security ............................................................................................................................9-12

O
Step 1: Mapping Security Requirements .......................................................................................................9-13
Step 2: Assigning Existing Pricing Entities to Operating Units (Entity Usage) ............................................9-14

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


ix
Practice - Assigning an Existing Price List to an Operating Unit (Entity Usage)......................................9-15
Solution - Assigning an Existing Price List to an Operating Unit (Entity Usage).....................................9-16
Step 3: Creating Privileges for Existing Pricing Entities...............................................................................9-18
Practice - Creating a Privilege ...................................................................................................................9-19
Solution - Creating a Privilege...................................................................................................................9-20
Step 4: Setting Security Profile Options to Define Defaulting Security Rules ..............................................9-22
Practice - Setting up Default Security Profile Options ..............................................................................9-23
Solution - Setting up Default Security Profile Options..............................................................................9-24
Security Implementation Steps – Before Turning Security On .....................................................................9-27
Step 5: Turning Security On ..........................................................................................................................9-29
Step 6: Confirm Security Settings .................................................................................................................9-30
Security for Operating Units..........................................................................................................................9-31
Entity Usage ..................................................................................................................................................9-32
Owned by Operating Unit..............................................................................................................................9-33
Global Usage .................................................................................................................................................9-34
Creating Privileges ........................................................................................................................................9-35
Privileges: Grantee Types/Grantees...............................................................................................................9-36
Privileges: Access Level................................................................................................................................9-39
Privileges .......................................................................................................................................................9-40
Changing the Access Privileges.....................................................................................................................9-41
Entity Sets......................................................................................................................................................9-43
After the Security Upgrade: Impact of Changes............................................................................................9-44
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access Control .......................................................9-45
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access Control (MOAC)........................................9-46
Benefits of Using Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security ................................................................9-47
Prerequisites for Enabling Multi-Org Access Control...................................................................................9-48
Setting Up Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security...........................................................................9-49
Multi-Org Process: Creating a Price List or Modifier ...................................................................................9-50
m y
e
Controlling Access by Pricing Security.........................................................................................................9-51

d
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Pricing Security Administrator ..........................................9-52
Example of Controlling Operating Unit Access by Pricing Security ............................................................9-53
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation Considerations ..........................................9-55

c a
Multi-Org Access Control: Global Usage .....................................................................................................9-57

A
Multi-Org Access Control: Secondary Price Lists.........................................................................................9-58
Multi-Org Access Control: Benefit Price List for Promotional Goods..........................................................9-59

e
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Cross-Order Volume Report..............................................9-60
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Implementation Considerations .........................................9-61

r a
Copying Price Lists and Modifiers ................................................................................................................9-62
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Process: Integrations...........................................................9-63

O ly
Summary........................................................................................................................................................9-64
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................10-1

l & On
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................10-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................10-4

n a e
Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer ..........................................................................................10-5
Setting Profile Options for Pricing Engine Request Viewer..........................................................................10-7

t e r U s
Pricing Engine Request Viewer.....................................................................................................................10-8
Using the Pricing Engine Request Viewer ....................................................................................................10-9

n
Pricing Engine Request Viewer Window ......................................................................................................10-10

I
Debug Log window .......................................................................................................................................10-11
Diagnostics Concurrent Programs .................................................................................................................10-12

e
c l
Diagnostics: Performance Analysis Concurrent Program .............................................................................10-13
Diagnostics: List Line Details Concurrent Program......................................................................................10-14

r a
Pricing Engine Messages and Diagnosis .......................................................................................................10-15
Oracle Advanced Pricing Diagnostics and Troubleshooting White Paper ....................................................10-16

O
Summary........................................................................................................................................................10-17

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


x
Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course

• Working experience with Oracle Advanced Pricing and Oracle Applications.

Prerequisites

• There are no prerequisites for this course.

How This Course Is Organized

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and
hands-on exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts
and skills introduced.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xi
Related Publications
Oracle Publications
Title Part Number
Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Manual B31440-01
Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide B31581-02
Oracle Order Management Open Interfaces, API, and Electronic B31585-01
Messaging Guide
Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual B25975-01

Additional Publications

• System release bulletins

• Installation and user’s guides

• Read-me files

• International Oracle User’s Group (IOUG) articles

• Oracle Magazine
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xii
Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions in Text
Convention Element Example
Bold italic Glossary term (if The algorithm inserts the new key.
there is a glossary)
Caps and Buttons, Click the Executable button.
lowercase check boxes, Select the Can’t Delete Card check box.
triggers, Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the ORD block.
windows Open the Master Schedule window.
Courier new, Code output, Code output: debug.set (‘I”, 300);
case sensitive directory names, Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX)
(default is filenames, Filename: Locate the init.ora file.
lowercase) passwords, Password: User tiger as your password.
pathnames, Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects
URLs, URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com
user input,
User input: Enter 300
usernames
Username: Log on as scott
Initial cap Graphics labels Customer address (but Oracle Payables)
(unless the term is a

Italic
proper noun)
Emphasized words Do not save changes to the database.
m y
and phrases,
titles of books and Reference Manual.
d e
For further information, see Oracle7 Server SQL Language

courses,
variables
Enter user_id@us.oracle.com, where user_id is the
name of the user.
ca
Quotation
marks
Interface elements
with long names A
Select “Include a reusable module component” and click Finish.

e
that have only
initial caps;
c l
This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, “Working with
Objects.”
lesson and chapter
titles in cross-
r a
Uppercase
references
SQL column O ly Use the SELECT command to view information stored in the
names, commands,
l
functions, schemas,& On LAST_NAME
column of the EMP table.
table names

n a e
Arrow
Brackets
Commas
Menu paths
Key names

t e r
Key sequences
U s Select File > Save.
Press [Enter].
Press and release keys one at a time:

Plus signs I n
Key combinations
[Alternate], [F], [D]
Press and hold these keys simultaneously: [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xiii
Typographic Conventions in Code
Convention Element Example
Caps and Oracle Forms When-Validate-Item
lowercase triggers
Lowercase Column names, SELECT last_name
table names FROM s_emp;

Passwords DROP USER scott


IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
PL/SQL objects OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
(OG_GET_LAYER (‘prod_pie_layer’))

Lowercase Syntax variables CREATE ROLE role


italic
Uppercase SQL commands and SELECT userid
functions FROM emp;

Typographic Conventions in Oracle Application Navigation Paths


This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you
through Oracle Applications.

(N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve
m y
This simplified path translates to the following:
d e
1. (N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches
ca
Summary.

e A
2.
l
(M) From the menu, select Query then Find.

c
3. (B) Click the Approve button.
r a
Notations:
O ly
(N) = Navigator
l & On
(M) = Menu
n a e
(T) = Tab
t e r U s
(B) = Button
I n
l e
(I) = Icon

c
r a (H) = Hyperlink

O (ST) = Sub Tab

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xiv
Typographical Conventions in Oracle Application Help System Paths
This course uses a “navigation path” convention to represent actions you perform to find
pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.

The following help navigation path, for example—

(Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals

—represents the following sequence of actions:

1. In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.

2. Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.

3. Under Journals, select Enter Journals.

4. Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system
window.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xv
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Advanced Pricing Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xvi
Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a qualifier group. (A qualifier group consists of one
or more qualifying conditions that enable you to define eligibility criteria for a modifier,
modifier line, or price list.) You then append the qualifier group to a discount modifier list so
that all the qualifier conditions for the qualifier group are appended to the modifier. Finally, you
create a sales order so that the discount modifier for 5% is applied to the sales order.

Notes: A qualifier group can only be created in the Forms-based UI, but once created, it can be
appended to a price list or modifier in either the HTML or forms-based UI.

Grouping numbers define how the pricing engine should evaluate qualifier conditions:

• Qualifiers assigned the same grouping number are evaluated as a boolean AND condition
(an entity must meet all of the conditions to qualify).

• Qualifiers assigned different grouping numbers are evaluated as a boolean OR condition (an
entity must meet one of the conditions to qualify).


y
If -1 is used as a qualifier grouping number, the qualifier is ANDED to each qualifier group
so you do not have to manually add it to each qualifier group.
m
Assumptions
d e
• You can navigate standard Oracle Applications.
ca

e
You have basic knowledge of Oracle Advanced Pricing. A

c l
r a
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

• O ly
You have access to the Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations and Order

& On
Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibilities.
l
Tasks
n a e
e r s
Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group
t U
I n
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1.
l e
Navigate to the Advanced Pricing-Define Modifier window.

c
r
2.
a Enter the following in the Main tab:
− Modifier Type = Discount List
O − Number = XX-Discount 1

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 33
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Discount 1
− Version =1
− Start Date = Today’s date
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

3. Click the List Qualifiers button.

4. Select your XX-Qualifier Group 1.

5. Click OK.

6. Click OK to close the Qualifier - Header Level Qualifiers window. This action applies the
qualifier group to all modifier lines defined in the Modifiers Summary tab.

7. In the Modifiers Summary tab:

Modifier Modifier Modifier Start/ Finish Pricing Incompatibility Bucket


Number Level Type Dates Phase Level

8.
1 Line Discount

In the Discounts/Charges tab:


Optional 10 (blank) 1

m y
− Application Method =Percent
d e
− Value = 5

c a
9. Click Line Qualifiers to display the qualifier groups.

e A
c l
OPTION: If you press OK now you can create a new qualifier that would qualify just this
modifier line (not all modifiers in the list). Instead, select (B) Cancel. We will not add a
modifier line-level qualifier.
r a
O ly
10. When you return to the Define Modifier window, your work is automatically saved. You

& On
now have a discount of 5% for all products ordered, only when the following criteria is met:

• l
a e
Customer is XX-Big City Electronics, and


r n s
Price list for the order is XX-Price List 1

n t e U
11. Return to the modifier header and select the Active check box.

e I
12. Save your work and close the window.

c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 34
Creating a Sales Order Using a Discount Modifier

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

13. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

14. Enter the following data in the Order Information tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics. Required Header information defaults from
your customer setup.
− Price List = XX-Price List 1

15. In the Line Items tab:


− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
− Qty = 1

16. Save your work, and note the order number ____________ .

17. Select Actions > View Adjustments.

18. In the Adjustments tab, note the applied discount as a result of the qualifier for the 5%
modifier.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 35
Solution - Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group
Creating a Discount Modifier Using a Qualifier Group

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing-Define Modifier window.

2. (T) Main:
− Modifier Type = Discount List
− Number = XX-Discount 1
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Discount 1
− Version =1
− Start Date = Today’s date
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
3.
c l e
(B) List Qualifiers.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 36
4. Select your XX-Qualifier Group 1.
m y
5. (B) OK.
d e
6. (B) OK to close the Qualifier - Header Level Qualifiers window.
c a
e A
This action applies the qualifier group to all modifier lines defined in the Modifiers
Summary tab.
c l
7. (T) Modifiers Summary tab:
r a
O ly
Modifier
Number
Modifier
Level
l & On
Modifier
Type
Start/
Finish
Pricing
Phase
Incompatibility Bucket
Level

n a e Dates
1 Line

t e r U s
Discount Optional 10 – List
Line
(blank) 1

I n Adjustment

8.
l e
(T) Discounts/Charges:

c
− Application Method = Percent

r a − Value = 5

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 37
m y
9. (B) Line Qualifiers to display the qualifier groups.

d e
ca
OPTION: If you press OK now you can create a new qualifier that would qualify just this
modifier (not all modifiers in the list). Instead, select (B) Cancel. We will not add a
Modifier Line level qualifier.

e A
c l
10. When you return to the Modifier window, your work is automatically saved. You now have
a discount of 5% for all products ordered, but only when the following criteria is met:

• r a
Customer is XX-Big City Electronics, and
O ly

& On
Price list for the order is XX-Price List 1

l
a e
11. Return to the header of the modifier and select the Active check box.

n
12. (I) Save.

t e r U s
n
Creating a Sales Order Using a Discount Modifier
I
c l e
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

a
13. Navigate to the Sales Orders (Vision Operations) window.

O r • (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 38
14. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics. Required sales order header information
defaults from your customer setup.
− Price List = XX-Price List 1

m y
d e
ca
15. (T) Line Items:
e A
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
− Qty = 1
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 39
m y
16. (I) Save. Note the order number ____________ .

d e
17. (B) Actions > View Adjustments.

ca
A
18. (T) Adjustments. Note the applied discount as a result of the qualifier for the 5% modifier.

e
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 40
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 41
Surcharge Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Surcharge Modifier

c l
A Surcharge modifier increases the cost of an item. It can be applied using the following
application methods:
r a
• Percent
• Amount O ly
• New price
l & On
• Lump sum

n a e
Scenario 1
t e r
A surcharge can be used to apply taxes, handling charges, and other special costs in the price.

U s
I
2-percent surcharge. n
Customers in the National Accounts territory who spends less than $1000 per order receives a

Scenario 2

c l e
Any customer placing a rush order (delivery required within two days) has to pay a $50

r a
surcharge for special handling.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 42
Practice - Creating a Surcharge Modifier
Overview
In this practice you will create a surcharge modifier. You then enter a sales order to see the
surcharge applied. You will use XX-Big City Electronics as the customer.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Defining General Information for the Surcharge Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations (USA)


m y
1. Navigate to the Create Surcharge List: General Information page.
d e
2. Enter the following data:
c a
− Name = QP-BC Electronics Order Surcharge
− Number = QP-Surcharge 1
e A
− Version Number = Blank.
c l
− Currency = Defaults
r a
− Description = Automatic 10% Surcharge with Price List 2.

− Start Date = Default


− End Date = Tomorrow's date O ly
l & On
3.
a e
Click Next to display the Create Surcharge List: Qualifiers page.

n
Creating Qualifiers

t e r U s
4.
n
Enter the following qualifiers:

I
c l e Attribute Operator Value From

r a Price List Is XX-Price List 2

O Customer Name Is XX-Big City Electronics

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 43
5. Click Apply, then click Next to add a surcharge modifier line. The modifier line defines
details about the actual surcharge to be applied.

6. Click Create Line to create a new modifier line:


− Modifier Type = Surcharge
− Start Date = Current
− End Date = Tomorrow

Creating Controls

7. Click Continue to display the Controls page.

8. Enter Controls:
− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment
− Bucket = Pricing Adjustments Bucket 1
− Incompatibility = Blank
− Apply automatically = Selected

9. Click Next to display the Create Surcharge Line: Product and Benefit page.

Entering Product and Benefit information

10. Enter product and benefit information:


m y
− Product Level = All Items
− UOM = Ea
d e
11. In Benefit region:
ca
− Value = 10
− Adjustment Method = Percent
e A
c l
r a
You now have a surcharge of 10% for all products ordered, only when
− The customer is XX-Big City Electronics and

O ly
− The price list used for the order is XX-Price List 2

& On
12. Click Next to display Qualifiers page, but do not select any line qualifiers.
l
a e
13. Click Apply to save your changes.
n
Entering a Sales Order
t e r U s
I n
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

l e
14. Enter a Sales Order for XX-Big City Electronics with the following line items:

c
r a Ordered Item Quantity

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 44
XX- Phone 3
XX-Palm Pilot 5

15. Save the sales order.

16. After saving the order, there should be a surcharge of 10% added to your lines.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 45
Solution - Creating a Surcharge Modifier
Defining General Information for the Surcharge Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Create Surcharge List: General Information page.

• (N) Oracle Pricing User > Home > Advanced Pricing Home page > Create Surcharge
List

2. In General Information page:


− Name = QP-BC Electronics Order Surcharge
− Number = QP-Surcharge 1
− Version Number = Blank
− Description = Automatic 10% Surcharge with Price List 2.
− Currency = Defaults
− Start Date = Default
− End Date = Tomorrow's date

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
a
3. (B) Next.

O r
4. (B) Create Qualifier.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 46
Creating Qualifiers

5. Enter the following qualifiers. After adding the first qualifier, click Add Another Row to
enter the second qualifier:

Attribute Operator Value From


Price List Is XX-Price List 2
Customer Name Is XX-Big City Electronics

m y
d e
c a
e A
6. (B) Apply.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 47
7. (B) Finish.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
8. (B) Yes.
l & On
n a e
9. (B) Create Line.
t e r
Creating a Surcharge Modifier Line

U s
I
Creating Modifier Linen
l e
− Modifier Type = Surcharge

c
− Start Date = Current

r a − End Date = Tomorrow

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 48
10. (B) Continue

Creating Controls for the Modifier Line

11. Enter Controls:


− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment
− Bucket = Pricing Adjustments Bucket 1
− Incompatibility = Blank
m y
− Apply automatically = Selected

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c
(B) Next.
l e
r a
Entering Product and Benefit information

O − Product = All Items


− UOM = Ea
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 49
12. In Benefit region:
m y
− Value = 10
− Adjustment Method = Percent
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
13. (B) Next to display Qualifiers page.

l & On
Note: If you click Create Qualifier or Append Qualifier, you can create a new qualifier that
a e
would qualify for just this modifier line (not all modifier lines in the list). Instead, select (B)
n
t e r U s
Finish. We will not add a Modifier Line level qualifier.

n
14. (B) Finish.

e I
15. Return to the General Information tab, and select the Active check box.

c
16. (B) Apply.l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 50
Entering a Sales Order

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

17. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

18. (T) Main tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Price List: XX-Price List 2

19. Enter a Sales Order for XX-Big City Electronics.

(T) Line Items:

Ordered Item Quantity


XX- Phone 3
XX-Palm Pilot 5

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
20. (I) Save your work.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 51
21. After saving the order, there should be a surcharge of 10% added to your lines.

22. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. View your price adjustments and see which modifier
attached.

m y
d e
ca
23. (B) Apply.

e A
24. Save your work.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 52
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier

c l
Use this modifier to apply freight costs to the order total. For example, any customer placing

r a
an order for less than $500 pays a freight charge of 20 percent of the order cost.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 53
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier (continued)
Freight and Special Charges Modifiers enable you to define how to apply charges to orders.

r a
You can apply the modifiers automatically or manually. Here are the steps for setting up
automatic order level charges using qualifiers along with the modifiers:
O ly
1. Select the Freight and Special Charges List as the type of modifier.

& On
2. Enter the modifier lines, specifying that the modifier is to be applied at the order level.
l
n a e
3. Select the header level qualifiers applicable at the list level.
You can define the qualifier to accept only orders with Freight Terms of Prepay and Add. Now

t e r U s
when you enter an order with Freight Terms of Prepay and Add, the charges are applied to the
order automatically and you can view them in the order window.

I n
Note: This is only one example of a type of setup--Freight and Special Charges Modifiers can
be set up in other ways.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 54
Practice - Creating a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier
Overview
In this practice, you create a Freight and Special Charge List modifier using formulas, modifiers
and qualifiers. In this exercise you will define:

• Two Special Charge Formulas

• A Modifier List with four line modifiers that determine how to use the formulas

• List and line qualifiers to determine eligibility

Note: For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges corresponding to ONLY
ONE Charge name (such as "Freight Costs") even if several charge names qualify.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User responsibility

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

m y
Tasks
d e
Define the First Formula
c a
1. Navigate to the Pricing Formulas window.

e A
2. Enter the following:
− Name = XX-Freight
c l
r a
− Description = Dollar Amount x Constant .01
− Formula = 1*2
O ly
Formula Type
l & On
Pricing Attribute
Context
Pricing
Attribute
Component Step

Pricing Attribute
n a e
Volume Item Amount N/A 1
Numeric Constant

t e r
N/A

U s N/A .01 2

3. Save your work


I n
l e
Define the Second Formula
c
r
4.
a Place your cursor on the Formula name field, clear the record, and enter the next formula:
− Name = XX-Handling
O − Description = Item Quantity x Constant .05

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 55
− Formula = 1*2

Formula Type Pricing Attribute Pricing Component Step


Context Attribute
Pricing Attribute Volume Item Quantity N/A 1
Numeric Constant N/A N/A .05 2

5. Save your work.

Defining a Freight and Special Charge Modifier List

6. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing – Define Modifier window.

7. In the Main tab enter the following List information:


− Type = Freight and Special charge List
− Number = XX-Freight and Handling
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Freight and Handling
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default
− Currency =Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description
m y
8. Click List Qualifiers to add the following qualifier:
d e
c a
A
Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Precedence Operator Value From
Number Context Attribute
1 Modifier List
l
Price List

c e Defaults = XX-Price List 1

1 Order

r a
Order Type Defaults = Mixed

9. Click OK.
O ly
& On
10. In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter the following modifier line information:
l
Modifier
n a e
Number

Freight1
Level
Line
t e r U s
Modifier Type
Freight/Special
Start/End Dates
Optional
Automatic
Selected
Pricing Phase
50 (Line
Bucket
1

I nCharge Charges)

l e
11. In the Discounts/Charges tab, enter the following information:

c
O ra Charge Name
Freight Costs XX-Freight
Formula Application Method
Lumpsum
Value
(blank)

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 56
12. Click Line Qualifiers and enter the following qualifier data:

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Value Value


Number Context Attribute Precedence Operator From To
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000

13. Click OK.

14. In the Modifiers Summary tab, create a new modifier line:

Modifier Start/End
Number Level Modifier Type Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Freight2 Order Freight/Special Optional Selected 70 (Charges: (blank)
Charge Header/All Lines)

15. In the Discounts/Charges tab:

Charge Name Application Method Value


Freight Costs Lumpsum 750

16. Click Line Qualifier to create a Line Level Qualifier.

Grouping
Number
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute Precedence Operator
Value
From
Value To
m y
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0
d e 10000

17. Click OK.


c a
18. In the Modifiers Summary tab, create a new modifier line:
e A
Modifier
c l Start/End
Number Leve Modifier Type
l r a Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket

Handling1 Line Freight/Special


O ly Optional Selected 50 (Line 1
Charge

l & On Charges)

a e
19. In the Discounts/Charges tab:
n
Charge Name

t e r U s
Formula Application Method Value
Handling Costs

I n XX-Handling Lumpsum Blank

c l e
20. Click Line Qualifiers and create a Line Level Qualifier.

r aGrouping
Number
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute
Precedence Operator Value
From
Value
To

O 1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 57
21. Click OK.

22. In the Modifier Summary tab, create a new modifier line:

Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket


Number Dates
Handling Order Freight/Special Optional Selected 70 (Charges: (blank)
2 Charge Header/All Lines)

23. In the Discounts/Charges tab:

Charge Name Application Method Value


Handling Costs Lumpsum 50

24. Click Line Qualifier to create a Line Level Qualifier.

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Precedence Operator Value Value To


Number Context Attribute From
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.99

25. Click OK.

26. In the Modifier Summary tab, create a new modifier line:


m y
Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic
d
Pricing Phase e Bucket
Number
Handling Order Freight/Special
Dates
Optional Selected
c a
70 (Charges: (blank)
2 Charge

e A
Header/All Lines)

27. In the Discounts/Charges tab:


c l
Charge Name
r a
Application Method Value
Handling Costs
O ly
Lumpsum 50

l & On
28. Click Line Qualifier to create a Line Level Qualifier.

n a e
Grouping
Number
Qualifier
Context

t e r s
Qualifier
Attribute

U
Precedence Operator Value
From
Value To

n
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 10001 999999

e I
29. Return to the Main tab of the Modifier header and select the Active check box.

c l
30. Save your work.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 58
Creating a Sales Order Using the Freight and Handling Charge
Modifier
31. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

32. In the Main tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List1

33. In Line Items tab:


− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
− Quantity =1

34. Save your work and note the order number ---------------.

35. Click Actions > Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges.

36. Close the window.

37. Navigate to the Order Information tab, and select Actions > Charges. No charges should
apply.

38. Close the Charges window


m y
d e
39. Increase the quantity ordered (such as quantity 20) of the order line so that the ordered
amount exceeds $10,000.

ca
40. Save your work.

e A
c l
41. Click Actions > Select Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges. There should be
none (provided Order Total is above $10,000).

r a
42. Close the window and select the Order Information tab.

O ly
& On
43. Click Actions > Charges. There should be a line for Freight Costs of $750 and a line for

l
Handling Costs of $50 (provided the Order Total is greater than $10,000).

a e
44. Save your work.

r n s
n t e U
e I
c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 59
Solution - Creating a Freight and Handling Charges Modifier
Define the First Formula

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Pricing Formulas window.

• (N) Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup

2. Enter the following:


− Name = XX-Freight
− Description = Dollar Amount x Constant .01
− Formula = 1*2

Formula Type Pricing Attribute Pricing Component Step


Context Attribute
Pricing Attribute Volume Item Amount N/A 1
Numeric Constant N/A N/A .01 2

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O3. (I) Save.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 60
Defining the Second Formula

4. Enter the next formula


− Name = XX-Handling
− Description = Item Quantity x Constant .05
− Formula = 1*2

5. Formula Lines region:

Formula Type Pricing Attribute Pricing Component Step


Context Attribute
Pricing Attribute Volume Item Quantity N/A 1
Numeric Constant N/A N/A .05 2

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
6. (I) Save.
t e r U s
I n
Defining a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier

l e
Note: For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges of one Charge Name (such as

c
"Freight Costs") only once even if more number of charges qualifies.

r
7. a Navigate to the Advanced Pricing – Define Modifier window.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 61
• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

8. (T) Main. Enter the following:


− Type = Freight and Special charge List
− Number = XX-Freight and Handling
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Freight and Handling
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default
− Currency =Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
9. (B) List Qualifiers.
n a e
Grouping
t e r
Qualifier
U s Qualifier Precedence Operator Value From
Number
I n
Context Attribute
XX-Price List1

e
1 Modifier List Price List Defaults =
1
c l Order Order Type Defaults = Mixed

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 62
10. (B) OK.

11. (T) Main, (T) Modifiers Summary.

Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket


Number
Freight1 Line Freight/Special
Dates
Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges)
m
1
y
Charge

d e
12. (T) Discounts/Charges.
c a
Charge Name Formula

e A
Application Method Value
Freight Costs XX-Freight

c l Lumpsum (blank)

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 63
m y
13. (B) Line Qualifiers:
d e
Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Precedence Operator
c
Value aValue
Number Context Attribute

e A
From To
1 Volume Order Amount

c l Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 64
14. (B) OK.

15. (T) Modifiers Summary to create a new modifier line:

y
Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Number Dates
Freight2 Order Freight/Special
Charge
Optional Selected 70 (Charges:
e
Header/All Lines) m
(Blank)

a d
16. (T) Discounts/Charges.

A c
e
Charge Name Application Method Value
Freight Costs Lumpsum
c l 750

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 65
m y
17. (B) Line Qualifier.

d e
Grouping
Number
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute Precedence Operator Froma
Value

c
Value
To

1 Volume Order Amount

e
Defaults BETWEEN A0 10000

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 66
18. (B) OK.

19. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line

Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket


Number Dates
Handling1 Line Freight/Special Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges) 1
Charge

20. (T) Discounts/Charges.

Charge Name Formula Application Method Value


Handling Costs XX-Handling Lumpsum Blank

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
n
21. (B) Line Qualifier and create a Line Level Qualifier.
I
Grouping
Number
c l e
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute
Precedence Operator Value
From
Value
To

O ra1 Volume Order


Amount
Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.
99

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 67
22. (B) OK.

23. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line:

y
Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/End Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Number Dates
Handling Order Freight/Special Optional Selected 70 (Charges:
e m
(blank)

d
2 Charge Header/All Lines)

24. (T) Discounts/Charges.


c a
Charge Name
e
Application Method Value A
Handling Costs Lumpsum
c l 50

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 68
m y
25. (B) Line Qualifier. Create a Line Level Qualifier:

d e
Grouping
Number
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute Precedence
Operator

c
Froma
Value Value To

1 Volume Order Amount

e
Defaults BETWEEN
A10001 9999999

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O26. (B) OK.
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 69
27. (T) Main tab.

28. Select the Active check box.

29. (I) Save your work.

Creating a Sales Order Using the Freight and Special Charge Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations


(USA)
30. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

31. (T) Order Information, (T) Main


− Customer: XX-Big City Electronics
− Order Type = Mixed
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List: XX-Price List 1

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
32. (T) Line Items
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
O − Quantity =1

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 70
m y
33. (I) Save your work and note the order number ______________.

d e
34. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 71
m y
d e
a
35. Close the window.

36. (T) Order Information.


A c
l e
37. (B) Actions > Charges. No charges should apply.

c
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 72
m y
d e
38. Close the Charges window.

ca
amount exceeds $10,000.

e A
39. Increase the quantity ordered (such as quantity 20) of the order line so that the ordered

40. (I) Save.


c l
r a
41. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges. There should be none

O ly
(provided Order Total is above $10,000).

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 73
m y
d e
42. Close the window.

ca
43. (T) Order Information tab.

e A
44. (B) Actions > Charges.

c l
r a
There should be a line for Freight Costs of $750 and a line for Handling Costs of $50
(provided the Order Total is greater than $10,000).

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 74
m y
d e
45. Save your work.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 75
Promotional Goods Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Promotional Goods Modifier

c l
Additionally, you can create ask for promotions or deals that the pricing engine does not apply

r a
unless the customer specifically asks for them.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 76
Practice - Creating a Promotional Goods (Free Good) Modifier
Overview
You are still not satisfied with the sales revenue from your mobile phones and accessories. You
therefore decide to end-date the two previous promotions and create a new promotion. This time
you will offer your customers a free Palm Pilot when ordering a XX-Standard Phone and a XX-
Phone Card. You are not sure of the availability of stock so you limit the promotion to the next
few days.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User responsibility

• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Defining a Modifier for the Promotion

m y
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

d e
2. In the Main tab, enter the following modifier list information:
− Type = Promotion
c a
− Number = XX-Free Good
− Active = Deselected (to start)
e A
c l
− Name = XX-Free Good (XX is a unique identifier such as your initials)
− Version = Blank
− Start/End Dates = Optional
r a
− Automatic = Selected
O ly
− Currency = Defaults

l & On
− Description = Enter a meaningful description.

3. Click List Qualifiers.


n a e
t e r U s
Note: Click (OK) if Qualifier Groups window displays.

4.
I n
Enter the following:

c l e
r a Grouping No. Context Attribute Operator Value From

O 1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 77
1 Modifier List Price List = XX-Price List 4

5. Click OK.

6. In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter the following modifier line information:

Modifier Level Modifier Start End Automatic Override Pricing


No. Type Date Date Phase
XX- Line Promotional Today One Selected Deselected 30 (All Lines
Promo Goods week Adjustment)
from
today

7. Modifiers Summary tab continued:


− Incomp. Level = Level 1
− Bucket = 1
− Product Attribute = Item Number
− Product Attribute Value = XX-Standard Phone
− Volume Type = Item Quantity
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = Ea
m y
− Value From = 1
− Value To = 999999
d e
8. Click Define Details to display the Define Modifier Details window. In the Products tab,
c a
enter the following data in the Additional Buy Products region:

e A
c l
Group
No.
Product
Attribute
r a
Product
Value
Pricing
Attribute
Operator Value From Value To

1 Item
O ly
XX-Phone Item Quantity Between 1 999999999
Number

l & On
Card

9.
a e
Enter the following data in the Get region:
n
t e r U s
Get
Product
I n Get
Product
UOM Get Quantity Get Price*** Application
Method
Value

Item
c l e
Attribute Value
XX-Palm Ea 1 XX-Price List 4 Percent 100

r a Number Pilot

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 78
***This field is used to enter the price list that you would like the value of the get item to
default from. The value will default into this field.

10. Save your work.

11. Return to the Main tab of the Modifier and select the Active check box.

12. Save your work.

Creating a Sales Order Using the Promotional Goods Modifier

13. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

14. In the Order Information tab, enter the following data:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Order Type = Standard
− Price List = XX-Price List 4

15. In the Lines tab, enter the following order line:

Ordered Item
XX-Standard Phone 1
Quantity

m y
XX-Phone Card 1
d e
16. Save your work.
ca
A
You should receive the following message. “A new line has been created for item XX-Palm
e
Pilot and for Quantity 1”.
c l
r a
17. Go to the line that was automatically added, that is, the line for the XX-Palm Pilot.

O ly
18. Click Actions > View Adjustments. You will see the details of the modifier you applied.

l & On
19. Click Related Details. Note that the XX-Standard Phone is listed as the related line.

n a e
20. Return to the sales order line with XX-Standard Phone.

t e r U s
21. Click Actions > View Adjustments. View the details of the modifier you applied.

I n
22. Click Related Details. Note the XX-Palm Pilot as the related item.

l e
23. Click OK and save your work.
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 79
Solution - Creating a Promotional Goods (Free Good) Modifier
Creating a Coupon Issue Modifier

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. (T) Main tab


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Free Good
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Name = XX-Free Good (XX is a unique identifier such as your initials)
− Version = Blank
− Start/End Dates = Optional
− Automatic = Selected
− Currency = Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O3. (B) List Qualifiers.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 80
Creating List Qualifiers

Note: Click (OK) if the Qualifier Groups window displays.

4. Enter the following data in the Header Level Qualifiers window:

Grouping No. Context Attribute Operator Value From


1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics
1 Modifier List Price List = XX-Price List 4

m y
d e
c a
5. (B} OK.
e A
6. (T) Modifiers Summary
c l
r a
Modifier Level Modifier O ly Start End Automatic Override Pricing
No. Type

l & On Date Date Phase


XX-
Promo
Line

n
Goods
a e
Promotional Today One
week
Deselected Cleared 30 (All Lines
Adjustment)

t e r U s from
today

7.
I n
(T) Modifiers Summary (continued)

c l e
− Incomp. Group = Level 1 Incomp.
− Bucket = 1

r a − Product Attribute = Item Number


− Product Attribute Value = XX-Standard Phone

O − Volume Type = Item Quantity

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 81
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = Ea
− Value From = 1
− Value To = 999999

m y
d e
c a
e A
Defining the Additional Buy Product
c l
8. (B) Define Details.
r a
O ly
(T) Products, Additional Buy Products region:

l & On
Group Product
n a e
Product Pricing Operator Value Value To

1
No. Attribute
Item
t e r U s
Value
XX-Phone
Attribute
Item Between 1
From
999999999

I n
Number Card Quantity

l e
Defining the Get Product

c
9.
r a Get region:

O Get Get UOM Get Get Price*** Application Value

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 82
Product Product Quantity Method
Attribute Value
Item XX-Palm Ea 1 XX-Price List 4 Percent 100
Number Pilot

***This field is used to enter the price list that you would like the value of the get item to
default from. The value will default into this field.

10. (I) Save.

11. (T) Main


− Active = Selected

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
12. (I) Save.
n a e
t e r U s
Creating a Sales Order Using the Promotional Goods Modifier

I n
13. Navigate to the Sales Order window.


l e
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
c
r a
14. (T) Order Information, (T) Main
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
O − Required Header information defaults from your customer setup

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 83
− Order Type = Standard
− Price List = XX-Price List 4

m y
d e
15. (T) Line Items, (T) Main
ca
e A
Ordered Item
c l
Quantity
XX-Standard Phone 1
r a
XX-Phone Card 1
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 84
m y
16. (I) Save.

d e
Pilot and for Quantity 1”.
ca
17. You should receive the following message. “A new line has been created for item XX-Palm

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
18. (B) OK

n a e
e r s
19. Go to the line that was automatically added, that is, the line for the XX-Palm Pilot

t U
I n
20. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. You will see the details of the modifier you applied.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 85
21. (B) Related Details. Note that the XX-Standard Phone is listed as the related line.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
22. Return to the sales order line with XX-Standard Phone.

c l e
23. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. View the details of the modifier you applied.

r a
24. (B) Related Details. Note the XX-Palm Pilot as the related item.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 86
25. (B) OK.

26. (I) Save.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 87
Term Substitution Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Term Substitution Modifier

c l
Replaces freight terms, shipping method, and payment terms with typically more favorable

r a
terms for the customer. For example, substituting Express Delivery service for Standard
Delivery (normally a higher price) without charging the customer the additional charges.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 88
Practice - Creating a Term Substitution Modifier
Overview
Set up a payment term substitution for orders that are at least $3000, as a marketing tool. Your
Customer Service Department can use this as an opportunity to increase revenue when a
customer is uncertain whether to buy now or later. Limiting the time period will allow you to
analyze the benefits of this modifier.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User responsibility

• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Creating a Term Substitution Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations


m y
1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
d e
2. In the Main tab, enter the following data:
c a
− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Terms
e A
− Active = Deselected, to start
c l
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Terms
r a
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default O ly
− Currency =Defaults
l & On
a e
− Description = Terms Substitution

n
3.
r s
In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter the modifier line details:

t e U
Modifier
Number I n Pricing
Phase
Incomp.
Group

c l eLevel Modifier
Type
Automatic Override Bucket

r a Defaults Line Term


Substitution
Selected Cleared 30 (All Lines Blank
Adjustment)
Blank

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 89
4. In the Promotion Terms tab, enter the following:
− Terms Attribute = Payment Terms
− Terms Value = Net 90

5. Save your work.

Creating Line Qualifiers

6. Click Line Qualifiers to add the following qualifiers:

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Operator Value Value To End Date


Number Context Attribute From
1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big Blank Tomorrow
City
Electronics
1 Volume Order Amount BETWEEN 3000 99999999 Blank

7. Click OK.

8. Return to the modifier header (main tab) and select the Active checkbox.

9. Save your work.


m y
10. Now enter an order to confirm that the terms substitution modifier is applied.
d e
Creating a Sales Order
c a
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

e A
11. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
c l
r
12. Enter the following in the Main tab:
a
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
O ly
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = Corporate
l & On
a e
13. In Line Items tab, Main sub-tab, enter the following:
n
t e r U s
Ordered Item
AS54888
I n 2
Quantity

c l e
14. In Pricing tab:

r a − Payment Terms = 30 Net (Defaults)

O15. Save the order line and note the order number ___________.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 90
16. In the Pricing tab, the Payment Terms field should now change to “Net 90”.

17. Save your work.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 91
Solution - Creating a Terms Substitution Modifier
Creating a Terms Substitution Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. (T) Main:
− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Terms
− Active = Deselected, to start
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Terms
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default
− Currency =Defaults
− Description = Terms Substitution

(T) Modifiers Summary. Enter the term substitution details:


m y
d e
Modifier
Number
Level Modifier
Type
Automatic Override Pricing Phase

c a
Incom.
Group
Bucket

Defaults Line Term


Substitution
Selected

e
Deselected 30 (All Lines
Adjustment) A Blank Blank

c l
3. (T) Promotion Terms:

r
− Terms Attribute = Payment Terms a
− Terms Value = Net 90
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 92
m y
Creating Line Qualifiers

d e
4. (B) Line Qualifiers. Enter the following qualifier lines:

c a
Grouping Qualifier Qualifier
e
Operator Value AValue To End Date
Number Context
l
Attribute

c
From
1 Customer

r
Name
a
Customer = XX-Big
City
Blank Tomorrow

O ly Electronics

& On
1 Volume Order BETWEEN 3000 99999999 Blank

l
a e
Amount

r n s
n t e U
e I
c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 93
5. Click OK.

6. (T) Main tab


− Active check box = Selected

7. Save your work.

m y
Creating a Sales Order

d e
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

ca
8. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

e A

l
(N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

c
9. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
r a
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

O ly
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = Corporate

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 94
m y
10. (T) Line Items, (T) Main:
− Ordered Item = AS54888
d e
− Quantity = 2
ca
11. (T) Pricing:
− Payment Terms = 30 Net (Defaults)
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 95
m y
12. (I) Save. Note the order number ___________.

d e
13. In the Pricing tab, the Payment Terms field should now change to “Net 90”.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 96
m y
14. Save your work.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 97
Item Upgrade Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Item Upgrade Modifier

c l
Replaces a specific item ordered with another item for the same price. For example, all

r a
customers in the VIP class who order item A receive an automatic upgrade of item B in its
place.
Implementation Considerations O ly
l & On
This modifier can only be defined at the item level. When setting up, the item relationships
must be set up in Inventory between the item and the upgraded items: select Promotional

n a e
Upgrade as the Relationship Type in the Item Relationships window (N) Inventory > Items >
Item Relationships.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 98
Implementation Considerations: Item Upgrade Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 99
Practice - Creating an Item Upgrade Modifier
Overview
You want to increase sales volume by offering your customers the Mobile Phone with WAP for
the same price as a standard mobile phone without WAP access. When a customer orders the
standard phone, they will automatically upgrade to the WAP Phone. We will also create a cross-
sell relationship between the XX-Phone and the XX-Phone Holder.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility

• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Creating an Item Relationship For the Upgrade

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)


m y
You first must define the item upgrade relationship.
d e
1.
ca
Navigate to the Item Relationships window. If the Organizations window opens, select M1.
In the Find Item Relationships window, press the New button.

e A
2. Enter the following:
− From Item = XX-Standard Phone
c l
− To Item = XX-WAP Phone
r a
− Type = Promotional Upgrade
− Reciprocal = Selected O ly
l & On
Creating an Item Relationship For Cross-Sell

n a e
r
− Item From = XX-Phone
t U
− Item To = XX-Phone Holder
s
1. Move your curser to the next line in the Item Relationships window.

e
I n
− Item Type = Cross-Sell

c l e
− Reciprocal = Selected

r a 2. Save your work.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 100
Creating a Modifier to Apply the Upgrade

Responsibility =Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

3. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

4. Enter the following data:


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Upgrade
− Active = Selected
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Upgrade
− Version = Blank
− Start Date = Today
− End Date = Tomorrow
− Currency = Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

5. Click List Qualifiers and add the following qualifier:

Grouping
No.
Context Attribute Operator Value From

m y
1 Customer Customer
Name
= XX-Big City
Electronics
d e
6. Click OK.
c a
7. Enter the modifier line details in the Modifiers Summary tab:
e A
− Modifier Number = XX-Upgrade
− Level = Line
c l
r
− Modifier Type = Item Upgrade
a
− Start Date = Today
− End Date = Tomorrow O ly
− Automatic = Selected
− Override = Deselected
l & On
n a e
− Pricing Phase = 10 (List Line Adjustment)

t e r U s
− Product Attribute = Item Number
− Product Attribute Value = XX-Standard Phone

− UOM = Ea I n
− Precedence = Defaults

8.
c l e
In the Promotion Upgrades tab, select the Upgrade Item = XX-WAP Phone.

r
9. a Save your work.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 101
Now create an order to confirm that the item gets upgraded to the XX-WAP Phone.

Creating a Sales Order Using the Upgrade Modifier

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

10. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

11. Enter the following in the Main tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List 6

12. In Line Items tab (Main tab), enter the following:

Line Ordered Item Quantity


1.1 XX-Standard Phone 1
2.1 XX-Phone 1

13. (I) Save your work and note the order number ____________.

The XX-Standard Phone item should be replaced by XX-WAP Phone. Note that the XX-
m y
Phone item has changed color and the Related Items button is now enabled.

d e
a
14. Click the Related Items button, select the XX-Phone Holder (cross-sell) item, and click OK.

c
XX-Phone Holder should have been added to the order

e A
The XX-Standard Phone item should be replaced by XX-WAP Phone and line 3.1 for an

15. Select the Line 1.1.


c l
r a
16. Click Actions > View Adjustments. You should see the details of the upgrade modifier that
you applied.
O ly
17. Save your work.
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 102
Solution - Creating an Item Upgrade Modifier
Creating an Item Relationship For the Upgrade

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Item Relationships window.

• (N) Inventory > Items > Item Relationships

2. Enter the promotional upgrade item:


− From Item = XX-Standard Phone
− To Item = XX-WAP Phone
− Type = Promotional Upgrade
− Reciprocal = Selected

3. In the next line in the Item Relationships window, enter the item relationship for the cross-
sell item:
− Item From = XX-Phone
− Item To = XX-Phone Holder
− Item Type = Cross-Sell
− Reciprocal = Selected
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O4. (I) Save.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 103
Creating a Modifier to Apply the Upgrade Item

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

5. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

6. (T) Main. Enter the following modifier header data:


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Upgrade
− Active = Selected
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Upgrade
− Version = Blank
− Start Date = Today
− End Date = Tomorrow
− Currency = Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 104
Creating a Qualifier for the Modifier List

7. (B) List Qualifiers. Enter the following data:

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Attribute Operator Value From


No. Context
1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

m y
d e
8. Click OK.
c a
Creating Modifier Line Details for the Item that you must buy to get the Upgrade

e A
9. (T) Modifiers Summary tab:
c l
− Modifier Number = XX-Upgrade
− Level = Line
r a
O ly
− Modifier Type = Item Upgrade
− Start Date = Today
− End Date = Tomorrow
l & On
− Automatic = Selected

n
− Override = Deselecteda e
e r s
− Pricing Phase = 10 (List Line Adjustment)
t U
− Product Attribute = Item Number

I n
− Product Attribute Value = XX-Standard Phone
− Precedence = Defaults
l e
− UOM = Ea
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 105
Enter Promotion Upgrade Item

10. (T) Promotion Upgrades.


− Upgrade Item = XX-WAP Phone

m y
d e
ca
11. (I) Save.
e A
c l
Creating a Sales Order Using the Upgrade Modifier

r a
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
O ly
& On
12. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

l

a e
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

n
t e r U s
13. (T) Order Information > (T) Main.
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

I n
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List 6

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 106
m y
14. (T) Line Items > (T) Main:

d e
Line Ordered Item Quantity
ca
1.1 XX-Standard Phone 1

e A
2.1 XX-Phone

c l1

r a
15. (I) Save your work and note the order number ____________.

O ly
The XX-Standard Phone item should be replaced by XX-WAP Phone. Note that the XX-

& On
Phone item has changed color and the Related Items is now enabled.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 107
m y
16. (B) Related Items. Select the XX-Phone Holder (cross-sell) item, and click OK.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
17. The XX-Standard Phone item should be replaced by XX-WAP Phone and line 3.1 for an

I n
XX-Phone Holder should have been added to the order

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 108
m y
18. Select the Line 1.1.

d e
19. (B) Actions > View Adjustments.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 109
20. (B) Apply.
m y
21. (I) Save.
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 110
Other Item Discount Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Other Item Discount Modifier

c l
Gives a price adjustment or benefit to a specified item on an order when the customer orders

r a
one or more other items on the same order. For example, if item A is purchased singularly, the
price is $20. However, using an OID (Other Item Discount) modifier, you can define a rule that
O ly
says when Item A is purchased at the same time as B, C, and D, the price of A is reduced from
$20 to $18.50.
Implementation Considerations
l & On
n a e
• Pricing phase must be tied to an event that looks at all lines on the order

t e r U s
• Benefit items can only defined at the item level, not item category
• Recurring Other Item Discounts are not applicable because the pricing engine should be

I n
evaluating the entire order
• May not be manual or overrideable

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 111
Practice - Creating an Other Item Modifier
Overview
In this practice, you will create an other item modifier, and apply it to a sales order. Scenario:
You want to motivate your customers to order a card for 30 calling hours when they order an
XX-Standard Phone. You decide to give them a mobile phone holder for half the price when they
order both the phone and the calling card. In other words, order item A and B and get a 50%
discount on item C.

Note: Before beginning this practice, query and deactivate the Upgrade Modifier from the
previous practice (XX-Upgrade), otherwise the Other Item Discount Modifier will use the XX-
WAP Phone rather than the XX-Standard Phone.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility


Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

m
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
y
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

d e
Tasks
ca
Creating a Modifier for the Other Item Discount

e A
c l
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1.
r a
Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

2. Enter the following values:


O ly
− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Other Item
l & On
a e
− Active = Deselected to start
n
t e r
− Automatic = Selected
s
− Modifier Name = XX-Other Item
U
I n
− Version = Blank
− Start/End Dates = Optional

c l e
− Currency = USD
− Description = Enter a meaningful description.

r
3. a Click List Qualifiers, then click OK.

O4. Enter the following qualifier values:


Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 112
Grouping Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Operator Value From
Number
1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

5. Click OK.

6. In the Modifiers Summary tab:

Modifier Level Modifier Automatic Override Pricing Incomp. Bucket


No Type Phase Group
XX- Line Other Selected Deselected 30 (All Level 1 1
Other Item Lines Incompatibility
Item 1 Discount Adjustment)

Modifiers Summary (continued)

Product Product Volume Break Operator UOM Value Value To


Attribute Attribute Type Type From

Item
Value
XX- Item Point BETWEEN Ea 0
m
999999
y
Number Standard
Phone
Quantity

d e
7. Click Define Details. c a
e A
8.
l
In the Products tab > Additional Buy Products region:

c
Group No
r a
Product Attribute Product Value
1
O ly
Item Number XX-Phone Card

9. In the Get region:


l & On
n a e
t e
Get Product Attribute r U s Get Product Value Application
Method
Value

Item Number
I n XX-Phone Holder Percent 50

c l e
10. Save your work.

r a
11. Go to Main tab of the modifier and select the Active check box.

O12. Save your work.


Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 113
Creating a Sales Order Using the Other Item Modifier

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

13. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

14. In the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup.
− Price List = XX-Price List 6

15. In the Lines tab:

Ordered Item Quantity


XX-Standard Phone 1
XX-Phone Card 1
XX-Phone Holder 1

16. Save your work.

Note: The XX-Phone Holder should be discounted by 50%.

m y
17. Select the sales order line with the XX-Phone Holder item.

d e
a
18. Select Actions > View Adjustments to view details about the modifier that you applied.

c
item.
e A
19. In the same window, click Related Details. You will see XX-Standard Phone as the related

c l
20. Select the sales order line with XX-Standard Phone.

r a
21. Select Actions > View Adjustments to view details about the modifier you applied.
O ly
item.
l & On
22. In the same window, click Related Details. You will see XX-Phone Holder as the related

n a e
Note: If you did not inactivate your Item Upgrade modifier, the Standard Phone will be

t e r U s
replaced with the WAP Phone in this practice.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 114
Solution - Creating an Other Item Modifier
Create a Modifier for the Other Item Discount

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. Enter the following values:


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Other Item
− Active = Deselected to start
− Automatic = Selected
− Modifier Name = XX-Other Item
− Version = Blank
− Start/End Dates = Optional
− Currency = USD
− Description = Enter a meaningful description.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O3. (B) List Qualifiers. (B) OK.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 115
4. Enter the following qualifier criteria:

Grouping Qualifier Context Qualifier Operator Value From


Number Attribute
1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City
Electronics

m y
d e
5. (B) OK.

c a
6. (T) Modifiers Summary:

e A
Modifier Level Modifier
c l
Automatic Override Pricing Incomp. Bucket
No Type
r a Phase Group
XX-
Other
Line Other
Item
O ly
Selected Deselected 30 (All
Lines
Level 1
Incompatibility
1

Item 1 Discount

l & On Adjustment)

a e
(T) Modifier Summary (continued):
n
t e r U s
Product
Attribute
I n
Product
Attribute
Volume
Type
Break
Type
Operator UOM Value
From
Value To

Item
c l e Value
XX- Item Point BETWEEN Ea 0 999999

r a Number Standard
Phone
Quantity

O7. (B) Define Details.


Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 116
8. (T) Products > Additional Buy Products region:

Group No Product Attribute Product Value


1 Item Number XX-Phone Card

9. Get region:

Get Product Attribute Get Product Value Application Value


Method
Item Number XX-Phone Holder Percent 50

10. (I) Save.

11. Go to Main tab of the modifier and select the Active check box.

12. (I) Save.

Creating a Sales Order Using the Other Item Modifier

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

m y
13. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

d e
• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

c a
14. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
e A
− Price List = XX-Price List 6
c l
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 117
m y
15. (T) Lines:

d e
Ordered Item Quantity
ca
XX-Standard Phone 1

e A
XX-Phone Card 1

c l
XX-Phone Holder 1

r a
16. (I) Save.
O ly
& On
Note: The XX-Phone Holder should be discounted by 50%.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 118
m y
17. Select the sales order line with the XX-Phone Holder item.

d e
a
18. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. You will see the details of the modifier that you applied.

c
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 119
m
19. In the same window, click Related Details. You will see XX-Standard Phone as the related
y
item.
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
l e
20. Select the sales order line with XX-Standard Phone.

c
a
21. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. You will see the details of the modifier you applied.
r
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 120
22. In the same window, click Related Details. You will see XX-Phone Holder as the related
m y
item.
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
l e
Note: If you did not inactivate your Item Upgrade modifier, the Standard Phone will be

c
replaced with the WAP Phone in this practice.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 121
Coupon Issue Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Coupon Issue Modifier

c l
For example, a Coupon Issue modifier has been set up to issue a coupon to every customer in

r a
the VIP class who places an order exceeding $45. The customer can then redeem the coupon
on a future order to receive 50-percent off item B. So if item B is originally $10, the price with
O ly
the coupon is reduced $5 (50-percent off).
Implementation Considerations

l & On
When setting up a coupon issue, two modifier lines must be set up. The price adjustment or

n a e
benefit (in this case, the 50-percent discount) will be linked to the coupon issue. When setting

t e r U s
up the coupon issue line, a modifier number is mandatory. The pricing engine uses the number
to generate as unique number series for the coupon. It passes the coupon number to the calling

n
application. The customer then quotes this number when redeeming the coupon.

I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 122
Practice - Setting up Automatic Coupon Issue and the Related
Benefit
Overview
Your company wants to motivate your customers to increase the order value for each order. You
therefore define a coupon that will be issued each time a customer places an order for more than
$1000. On another sales order, when the customer redeems the coupon and spends over $1500,
the sales order value will be discounted by 2%

The benefit for the customer is receiving a 2% discount when spending at least $1500. The
benefit for you is a higher order value per sales order and, therefore, a better relationship
between cost for processing a sales order and the revenue per sales order. Another benefit for
you, is customer loyalty, since the customer must place another order to receive the discount.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User responsibility, Vision Operations (USA)

• Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility, Vision Operations


m y
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

d e
Tasks

ca
Creating a Coupon Benefit (Discount) Modifier

e A
coupon is redeemed.
c l
You first must create the benefit (such as a discount) that the customer receives when the

1.
r a
Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

2. O ly
In the Main tab, enter the following list information:
− Type = Promotion
l & On
n a e
− Number = XX-Coupon Promo
− Active = Selected (select the check box)

t e r
− Automatic = Deselected

U s
− Name = XX-Coupon Promo (XX is a unique identifier such as your initials)

I n
− Global (if visible) = Selected

3.
l e
In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter the following modifier line information:

c
− Modifier No = XX-2%Disc (where XX are your initials)

r a − Level = Group of Lines


− Modifier Type = Discount
O − Automatic check box = Selected

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 123
− Override = Deselected
− Pricing Phase = 30 (All Lines Adjustment)
− Incompatibility Group = Level 1 Incompatibility
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment
− Bucket = Blank
− Product Attribute: All Items
− Product Attribute Value: ALL
− Volume Type = Item Amount
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = EA
− Value From = 1500
− Value To = 99999999

4. In the Discounts/Charges tab, enter the following information:


− Application Method = Percent
− Value = 2. This is the amount of the discount.

5. Save your work.

Now you have to create the Coupon Issue modifier (the actual coupon that the customer can
redeem).

m y
Creating the Coupon Issue Modifier line

d e
You will now create the Coupon Issue Modifier, restricting the 2% discount to the Coupon
Benefit Modifier from step A.
ca
A
Note: When issuing coupons, the system generates coupon numbers based on your modifier
e
c l
number. The first coupon issued will be number XX-Coup##. Because this is the number that the
customer will quote when redeeming the coupon, it is very important that your modifier number

r a
enables you to recognize the type of coupon.

6.
O ly
In the Modifiers Summary tab (on a new modifier line), enter the following modifier line
information:

l & On
− Modifier No = XX-Coup (where XX are your initials).

n a e
− Modifier Level = Group of Lines
− Modifier Type = Coupon Issue

t e r
− Automatic = Selected
− Override = Deselected
U s
I n
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event
− Incompatibility Group = Level 1 Incompatibility
l e
− Bucket = Blank
c
− Product Attribute: All Items

r a − Product Attribute Value: ALL

O − Volume Type = Item Amount

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 124
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = EA
− Value From = 1000
− Value To = 99999999

7. Select the Coupons tab and enter the following information:


− Enter an Expiration Date OR
− Enter an Expiration Start Date, Expiration Period, and Expiration Period Type
− Coupon Modifier Number = XX-2%Disc

Creating a Line Qualifier for the Coupon Issue line

8. In the XX-Coup line, click the Line Qualifiers button to display the Qualifier-Line Level
Qualifiers window.

9. Enter the following information:


− Grouping Number = 1
− Qualifier Context = Customer
− Qualifier Attribute = Customer Name
− Operator = =
− Value From = XX-Big City Electronics

10. Click OK and save your work.


m y
Notes:
d e
• ca
The fields Benefit Quantity and Benefit UOM are not used by the pricing engine for
A
coupon conversion. The Coupon Conversion Rate is used to specify the conversion of

e
c l
the Benefit UOM to the primary currency. For example, if one air mile is 0.50 currency
units, the coupon conversion rate is 0.50. Coupon Redemption Rate is the percentage

a
probability that customers might redeem this coupon
r

O ly
The Expiration Date field can be entered to restrict the redemption of coupons to that

& On
date. Alternatively, you can enter the Expiration Period and Expiration Period Type

l
(e.g. 1 Month). The pricing engine uses as a start date the first day a coupon is issued.

a e
The pricing engine will then calculate the expiration end date using the values you

r n
entered for period and period type.

s

t e U
You cannot select “=” as operator since no coupons have been created yet. However,

n
you will see later in this exercise that the pricing engine will add a line qualifier, where
I
coupon number = issued coupon number.

e
c l
Entering a Sales Order to Issue the Automatic Coupon

r a
11. Navigate to the Sales Order window. You will enter a quantity that ensures the resulting

O sales order line amount is more than $1000.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 125
12. In the Order Information, main tab:
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List 6

13. In the Line Items tab:


− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
− Quantity = 11 (must enter enough quantity to ensure a minimum sales order line
amount of $1000)

14. Book the order and note the order number_______________________

15. To confirm that a coupon has been issued, click the Actions button then select View
Adjustments. Notice that a coupon is issued with number XX-Coup###.

Creating a Sales Order to Redeem the Coupon

16. Enter a new sales order for XX-Big City Electronics.

17. (T) Order Information, (T) Main


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Order Type = Standard
− Price List = XX-Price List 6
m y
18. (T) Line Items
d e
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
ca
− Quantity = 20 (must enter enough quantity to ensure a minimum sales order line
amount of $1500)

e A
c l
19. Save your work and note the order number_______________________.

r a
To confirm that that the coupon has been applied:

O ly
20. Click Actions > Promotion/Pricing Attributes.

l & On
21. Select the Coupon tab. From the list of values, select the coupon number that was issued
XX-Coup### and click Apply.

n a e
e r s
The line price should be discounted by 2%.

t U
I n
22. Book the sales order.

l e
23. In the Line Items tab, Main sub-tab, click Actions > View Adjustments. Notice that another

c
coupon has been issued with number XX-Coup###.

r a
24. Re-query and deactivate the modifier XX-Coupon Promo that you created. (Hint: Query by

O XX% in Modifier Name).

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 126
25. Deselect the Active check box.

26. Click Save.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 127
Solution - Setting up Automatic Coupon Issue and the Related
Benefit
Creating a Coupon Benefit (Discount) Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. (T) Main tab


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Coupon Promo
− Active check box = Selected
− Automatic = Deselected
− Name = XX-Coupon Promo (XX is a unique identifier such as your initials)
− Global check box (if visible) = Selected

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
3.
r a (T) Modifiers Summary:
− Modifier No = XX-2%Disc (where XX are your initials)

O − Level = Group of Lines

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 128
− Modifier Type = Discount
− Automatic check box = Selected
− Override = Deselected
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment
− Incompatibility Group = Level 1 Incompatibility
− Product Attribute: All Items
− Product Attribute Value: ALL
− Volume Type = Item Amount
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = EA
− Value From = 1500
− Value To = 99999999

4. (T) Discounts/Charges:
− Application Method = Percent
− Value = 2. This is the amount of the discount.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
5. (I) Save.

c l e
r a
Now you have to create the Coupon Issue modifier (the actual coupon that the customer can
redeem).
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 129
Creating the Coupon Issue Modifier line

You will now create the Coupon Issue Modifier, restricting the 2% discount to the Coupon
Benefit Modifier from step A.

6. (T) Modifiers Summary:

7. Select the next blank modifier line, and enter the following:
− Modifier No = XX-Coup (where XX are your initials).
− Modifier Level = Group of Lines
− Modifier Type = Coupon Issue
− Automatic = Selected
− Override = Deselected
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event
− Incompatibility Group = Level 1 Incompatibility
− Bucket = Blank
− Product Attribute: All Items
− Product Attribute Value: ALL
− Volume Type = Item Amount
− Break Type = Point
− Operator = BETWEEN
− UOM = EA
− Value From = 1000
m y
− Value To = 99999999

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 130
m y
8. (T) Coupons:
− Enter an Expiration Date OR
d e
− Coupon Modifier Number = XX-2%Disc
ca
− Enter an Expiration Start Date, Expiration Period, and Expiration Period Type

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 131
m y
Creating a Line Qualifier for the Coupon Issue line

d e
9. Select the XX-Coup.

ca
10. (B) Line Qualifiers:
− Grouping Number = 1
e A
− Qualifier Context = Customer

c l
− Qualifier Attribute = Customer Name
− Operator = =
r a
− Value From = XX-Big City Electronics
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 132
11. (B) OK.

Creating a Sales Order to Issue the Automatic Coupon

12. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

m y
• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

d e
13. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
ca
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List 6
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 133
m y
14. (T) Line Items:
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot
d e
amount of $1000)
ca
− Quantity = 11 (must enter enough quantity to ensure a minimum sales order line

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 134
m y
15. (B) Book Order. Note the order number_______________________.

d e
a
16. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. Notice that a coupon is issued with number XX-Coup#.

c
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 135
17. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
m y
• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
d e
18. Query your XX-Coupon Promo modifier list.
ca
19. Select the XX-2%Disc modifier line.
e A
20. (B) Line Qualifiers.
c l
r a
You will see that the pricing engine has created additional qualifiers, which ensures that the
O ly
discount is only applied when one of the created coupon numbers is quoted.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 136
Creating a Sales Order to Redeem the Coupon

21. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

m y
22. (T) Order Information, (T) Main
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
d e
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Order Type = Standard
ca
− Price List = XX-Price List 6

e A
23. (T) Line Items
c l
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Pilot

r a
− Quantity = 20 (must enter enough quantity to ensure a minimum sales order line
amount of $1500)
O ly
& On
24. (I) Save your work and note the order number_______________________.
l
a e
25. (B) Actions > Promotions/Pricing Attributes:
n
26. (T) Coupons:
t e r U
− Coupon Number = XX-Coup###
s
I n
e
27. (B) Apply. The line price should be discounted by 2%.

c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 137
m y
28. (B) Book Order.

d e
XX-Coup###.
ca
29. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. Notice that another coupon has been issued with number

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 138
30. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
m y
• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
d e
ca
31. Re-query and deactivate the modifier XX-Coupon Promo that you created. (Hint: Query by
XX% in Modifier Name).
− Active check box = Deselected
e A
c l
32. (I) Save.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 139
Price Breaks Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Breaks Modifier

c l
Applies a variable discount or surcharge price adjustment to a pricing request that meets the

r a
condition of a break type. You can use both point and range break types.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 140
Practice - Creating a Modifier with Point and Range Breaks
Overview
In this practice you will define a discount modifier using point and range breaks. You will then
apply the modifier to a sales order.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Defining the Point and Range Break Modifier Header Information

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations


m y
1. Navigate to the Create Discount List: General Information page.
d e
2. Enter the following data:
ca
− Name = XX-Price Break
− Number = XX-Price Break
e A
− Version Number = Leave blank
c l
− Currency = Defaults
r a
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

− Start Date = Default


O ly
3.
l & On
Click Next to display the Qualifiers: Create Qualifier page.

4. Select the following:


n a e
− Operator = Is
t e r
− Attribute = Customer Name

U s
n
− Value From = XX-Big City Electronics
I
5.
l e
Click Apply, then Finish to add the modifier line details.

c
a
Creating the First Price Break Modifier Line

r
O6. Click Create Line to create a new modifier line:
− Modifier Type = Price Break

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 141
− Line Number = Defaults
− Start Date = Current

7. Click Continue to display the Controls page.

8. Enter Controls:
− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event
− Incompatibility = Blank

9. Click Next to display the Create Price Break Line: Products page.

10. Enter Products information:


− Product Level = Item Number
− Product = XX-Palm Pilot
− UOM = Ea
− Precedence = Defaults

11. Pricing Attributes region = Leave blank

12. Enter Price Break Benefits:


− Adjustment Type = Discount
− Volume Based on = Item Quantity
− Volume Method = Range
m y
− Accumulation Attribute = Blank
d e
13. Click Next to display the Create Price Break Line: Benefits page.
c a
A
14. In the Benefits region, enter the following Price Break Line Benefits information. Click Add

e
l
Another Row to add each row.

a c
0
Value From Value To
100 0
r
Adjustment Value

O ly
Adjustment Method
Amount
100 400

l & On
50 Amount
400 700

n a e100 Amount
700 999999

t e r U s
150 Amount

n
15. Click Next to display Qualifiers page, but do not select any line qualifiers.

e I
16. Click Next to review your entries in the Create Price Break Line: Review page.

c l
17. Click Finish.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 142
Creating the Second Price Break Modifier Line

18. Click Create Line to create a new modifier line:


− Modifier Type = Price Break
− Line Number = Defaults
− Start Date = Current

19. Click Continue to display the Controls page.

20. Enter Controls:


− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event
− Incompatibility = Blank

21. Click Next to display the Create Price Break Line: Products page.

22. Enter Products information:


− Product Level = Item Number
− Product = XX-Pager
− UOM = Ea
− Precedence = Defaults

23. Pricing Attributes region = Leave blank

m y
24. Enter Price Break Benefits:
− Adjustment Type = Discount
d e
− Volume Based on = Item Quantity
− Volume Method = Point
c a
− Accumulation Attribute = Blank

e A
c l
25. Click Next to display the Create Price Break Line: Benefits page.

r a
26. In the Benefits region, enter the following Price Break Line Benefits information. Click Add
Another Row to add each row.
O ly
l & On
Value From Value To

n a e
Adjustment Value Adjustment Method

r
0 100 0 Percent
100 400
t e 5
U s Percent
400 700
I n 10 Percent

e
700 999999 15 Percent

c l
27. Click Next to display Qualifiers page, but do not select any line qualifiers.

r a
O
28. Click Next to review your entries in the Create Price Break Line: Review page.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 143
29. Click Finish.

30. Navigate to the Update Discount List: General Information page, and select the Active
check box to make the modifier active.

Creating a Sales Order Using Price Break Modifiers

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

In this section, you will create a sales order. The modifier will then be automatically applied to
the order.

31. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

32. (T) Order Information, (T) Main


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics (Additional customer information defaults)
− Order Type = Standard
− Price List = XX-Price List 1

33. In Line Items tab, Main sub-tab:

Line Ordered Item Quantity UOM Price (retrieved as)


m y
1.1 XX-Palm Pilot 400 Ea $700.00 (Range)
d e
2.1 XX- Pager 400 Ea $700.00 (Point)

c a
Note on Calculations:

e A

l
The XX-Palm Pilot used the Range Point Break. The first 100 units receive a discount
c
r a
of zero. The Modifier calculation is based on the applicable volume of 300 divided by
the quantity ordered (400). In other words ¾ X 50 = 37.50 discount per item

• O ly
The XX-Pager used the Point Price Break. The calculation for the Pager simply applies

& On
5% of the list price based on the order point of 400 or $35.00 per unit

l
a e
34. Click Save. Note the order number ___________
n
e r s
35. Click Book Order. Book your order and note that since these modifiers are at the Book

t U
pricing event, the unit prices will change at booking based on the calculations above:

I n
− XX-Palm Pilot = $662.50
− XX-Pager = $665.00

c l e
36. To view the adjustments, click Actions > View Adjustments for each list line:

r a • (B) Actions > View Adjustments


O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 144
37. Click OK. From the Adjustments window, click Related Details to view additional details
about how the price break was applied.

• (N) Adjustments window > (B) Related Details

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 145
Solution - Creating a Modifier with Point and Range Breaks
Creating the Modifier List

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Create Discount List: General Information page.

• (N) Oracle Pricing User > Home > Advanced Pricing Home page

2. (Link) Create Discount List.

3. Enter the following data:


− Name = XX-Price Break
− Number = XX-Price Break
− Version Number = Leave blank
− Description = Enter a meaningful description
− Currency = Defaults
− Start Date = Default

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r
4.
a (B) Next.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 146
Creating a List Qualifier

5. (B) Create Qualifier.

6. Select the following data:


− Attribute = Customer Name
− Operator = Is
− Value From = XX-Big City Electronics

m y
d e
7. (B) Apply.

ca
8. (B) Next. Review your entries.

e A
9. (B) Finish.

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
10. (B) Yes.

c l e
r a
Creating the First Price Break Modifier Line

O11. (B) Create Line.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 147
12. Select the modifier line details:
− Modifier Type = Price Break
− Line Number = Defaults
− Start Date = Current

13. (B) Continue.

Defining Controls

14. Enter Controls for the modifier line:


m y
− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event d e
− Incompatibility = Blank
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
15. (B) Next.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 148
Defining Products

16. Enter product information:


− Product Level: Item Number
− Product = XX-Palm Pilot
− UOM = Ea
− Precedence = 220

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
17. Pricing Attributes region = Leave blank

18. Price Break Benefits region:


l & On
− Adjustment Type = Discount

n a e
− Volume Based on = Item Quantity

t e r
− Volume Method = Range

U s
− Accumulation Attribute = Blank

19. (B) Next.


I n
c l e
Defining Benefits

r a
20. Enter the following:

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 149
Value From Value To Adjustment Value Adjustment Method
0 100 0 Amount
100 400 50 Amount
400 700 100 Amount
700 999999 150 Amount

m y
d e
c a
e A
21. (B) Next.
c l
r a
22. Do not select any line qualifiers in the Create Price Break Line: Qualifiers page.
O ly
23. (B) Next. Review your entries.

l & On
24. (B) Finish.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 150
Creating the Second Price Break Line

25. (B) Create Line.

m y
26. Select the modifier line details:
− Modifier Type = Price Break
d e
− Line Number = Defaults
− Start Date = Current
ca
27. (B) Continue.
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 151
Defining Controls

28. Enter Controls:


− Modifier Level = Line
− Pricing Phase = Modifiers for BOOK Event
− Incompatibility = Blank

29. (B) Next.

Defining Products

30. Enter Products information:


− Product Level = Item Number
− Product = XX-Pager
− UOM = Ea
− Precedence = Defaults

31. Pricing Attributes region = Leave blank

32. Price Break Benefits region:


− Adjustment Type = Discount
− Volume Based on = Item Quantity
− Volume Method = Point
− Accumulation Attribute = Blank
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 152
m y
33. (B) Next.
d e
Defining Benefits
ca
e A
34. Enter the following values in the Benefits page. Click Add Another Row to create each new
line:
c l
Value From Value To
r a
Adjustment Adjustment

O ly
Value Method

& On
0 100 0 Percent
100 400 5
l
a e
Percent
400 700

r n10

s
Percent

e
700 999999 15 Percent

I n t U
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 153
m y
35. (B) Next. Do not select any line qualifiers in the Create Price Break Line: Qualifiers page.

36. (B) Next. Review your entries.


d e
37. (B) Finish.
ca
38. (B) Apply.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 154
39. Return to the Main header tab of the modifier XX-Price Break and select the Active check
box.

40. (B) Apply.

Creating a Sales Order Using Price Break Modifiers

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

41. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

• (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

42. (T) Order Information, (T) Main tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics (Additional customer information defaults)
− Order Type = Standard
− Price List = XX-Price List1

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
43. (T) Line Items, (T) Main:

c l e
Line Ordered Item Quantity UOM Price (retrieved as)

r a 1.1 XX-Palm Pilot 400 Ea $700.00 (Range)

O 2.1 XX- Pager 400 Ea $700.00 (Point)

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 155
m y
44. (I) Save. Note the order number ___________

d e
event, the unit prices will change at booking based on the calculations above:
ca
45. (B) Book Order. Book your order and note that since these modifiers are at the Book pricing

− XX-Palm Pilot = $662.50


− XX-Pager = $665.00
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 156
m y
46. To view the adjustments, click Actions > View Adjustments for each list line:

d e
• (B) Actions > View Adjustments

ca
about how the price break was applied.
e A
47. (B) OK. From the Adjustments window, click Related Details to view additional details


c l
(N) Adjustments window > (B) Related Details

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 157
m y
48. (B) OK.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 158
Practice - Creating a Price Break Modifier Using an Item Category
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a price break modifier using an item category.
You will then create a sales order and apply the price break modifier.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Verify which Default Item Category and Category Set your Items are in

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)


m y
1. Navigate to the Master Items window.
d e
If the Organization window opens, select M1.
ca
2.
e
Query one of your items (for example XX-Palm Pilot). A
3.
c l
Select Tools > Categories and note that the category associated with the Inv.Items Category
Set = NEW.MISC.
r a
O ly
Defining a Price Break Modifier using the Item Category from above

l & On
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations

4.
n a e
Navigate to the Define Modifier window, and enter the following details:
− Type = Discount List

t e r
− Number = XX-Item Category
U s
I n
− Active = Selected
− Automatic = Selected

l e
− Name = XX-Item Category

c
− Currency = USD

r a − Description = Enter a meaningful description.

O5. Click the List Qualifiers button, and select your qualifier group.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 159
6. In the Modifiers Summary tab:

Product
Modifier Modifier Product Break
Level Pricing Phase Attribute Volume UOM
Number Type Attribute Type
Value
Group Price
80 (Modifiers Item Item
1 of Break NEW.MISC Point Ea
at Book Event) Category Quantity
Lines Header

7. In the Price Breaks tab:


− Adjustment Type = Discount

8. In the Define Details tab:

Value From Value To Application Value


Method
0 100 Percent 10
100 999999999999 Percent 20

9. Save your work and close the form


m y
NOTE: This would be a good time to make sure that you have inactivated all previous
modifiers so that we can see the affect of just this category modifier.
d e
Creating a Sales Order Using the Price Break Modifier for an Item Category
c a
10. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
e A
c l
r
− Customer = XX Big City Electronics a
11. Enter the following information in the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:

O ly
− All remaining Sales Order Header information should default
− Price List = XX-Price List 1

l & On
12. In the Line Items tab, enter the following:

n a e
Line
t e r U s Ordered Item Quantity
1.1
I n XX-Palm Pilot 50
2.1
3.1
c l e AS54888
XX-Phone
40
30

r a
13. Book the order.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 160
The total quantity is 120 which would normally qualify for a 20% XX-Item Category
Discount. However, AS54888 is not in the New.Misc category so it will receive no discount
and the XX-Palm Pilot and XX-Phone will receive 10% since their combined quantity is
under a quantity of 100

14. Change the Quantity for your XX-Phone to 60.

15. Select Actions > Price Order.

16. Click OK.

You should now see a 20% discount for your XX-Palm Pilot and XX-Phone (their combined
quantity now exceeds 100) and still no discount for the AS54888.

Note: You can navigate to (B) Actions > View Adjustments to see the details of the
attached modifiers.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 161
Solution - Creating a Price Break Modifier Using an Item Category
Verify which Default Item Category and Category Set your Items are in

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

1. Navigate to the Master Items window.

• (N) Inventory > Items > Master Items

If the Organization window opens, select M1

2. Query one of your items (for example XX-Palm Pilot).

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
3. (M) Tools > Categories

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 162
Note the category associated with the Inv.Items Category Set: NEW.MISC.
m y
Defining a Price Break Modifier using the Item Category from above
d e
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations
ca
4. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
e A

c l
a
(N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

5. Enter the following details:


− Type = Discount List
r
O ly
− Number = XX-Item Category
− Active = Selected
l & On
− Automatic = Selected
n a e
− Currency = USD
t e r
− Name = XX-Item Category

U s
n
− Description = Enter a meaningful description
I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 163
m y
6. (B) List Qualifiers.

d e
7. Select your qualifier group. Your group should consist of the following qualifiers:
− Price List = XX-Price List 1
c a
− Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

e A
8. (B) OK.
c l
9. (T) Modifiers Summary Tab
r a
O ly
Modifier
Level
l
Modifier
& On
Pricing Phase
Product
Product
Attribute Volume
Break
UOM
Number Type

n a e Attribute
Value
Type

1 of
t r
Group Price

e
Break
U s80 (Modifiers Item
at Book Event) Category
NEW.MISC
Item
Quantity
Point Ea

n
Lines Header

e
10. (T) Price Breaks: I
l
− Adjustment Type = Discount
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 164
m y
11. (B) Define Details:

d e
Value From Value To Application Value
c a
e
Method
A
0
100
100
999999999999
c l Percent
Percent
10
20

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 165
m y
12. (I) Save. Close the window.

d e
modifiers so that we can see the affect of just this category modifier.
ca
NOTE: This would be a good time to make sure that you have inactivated all previous

Creating a Sales Order Using the Price Break Modifier for an Item Category
e A
13. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
c l

r a
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

O ly
& On
14. (T) Order Information, (T) Main
− Customer = XX Big City Electronics
l
a e
− All remaining Sales Order Header information should default

r n
− Price List = XX-Price List 1

s
n t e U
e I
c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 166
m y
15. (T) Line Items:

d e
Line Ordered Item Quantity
ca
1.1 XX-Palm Pilot

e
50
A
2.1 AS54888

c l 40
3.1 XX-Phone

r a 30

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 167
m y
16. (B) Book the Order.

d e
ca
The total quantity is 120 which would normally qualify for a 20% XX-Item Category
Discount. However, AS54888 is not in the New.Misc category so it will receive no discount

under a quantity of 100.


e A
and the XX-Palm Pilot and XX-Phone will receive 10% since their combined quantity is

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 168
m y
17. Change the Quantity for your XX-Phone to 60.

d e
18. (B) Actions > Price Order.

ca
19. (B) OK.

e A
c l
You should now see a 20% discount for your XX-Palm Pilot and XX-Phone (their combined
quantity now exceeds 100) and still no discount for the AS54888.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 169
m y
attached modifiers.
d e
Note: You can navigate to (B) Actions and select View Adjustments to see the details of the

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 170
Price Break Modifiers: Point Breaks

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Break Modifiers: Point Breaks

c l
Applies a variable discount or surcharge price adjustment to a pricing request that meets the

r a
condition of the break specified. You can use either a point or range break. The example above
displays the use of a point break header. Since the total value of 150 for Item A falls between
O ly
the 100 to 200 level, a 10-percent discount is applied.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 171
Price Break Modifiers: Range Breaks

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Break Modifiers: Range Breaks

c l
For range break, the pricing engine charges each unit of volume at the price of the break within

r a
which it falls. For example, if the total quantity of Item A is 150, the discount is applied as
follows:
O ly
• Value from 1-100: 5-percent discount

& On
• Value from 100-200: 10-percent discount
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 172
Price Breaks: Net Amount Calculation

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Breaks: Net Amount Calculation

c l
You can define net amount price break modifiers. These price breaks are calculated based on

r
the net amount of the previous buckets.
a
O ly
In the Net Amount Calculation field, select "For all matching attributes" to evaluate the lines
where the product and pricing attributes match the setup. If "For matching products" is

l & On
selected, only those lines that match the product will be evaluated, excluding pricing attributes.
• Forms-based UI: Select Net Amount Calculation value on the Price Breaks tab.

n a e
• HTML UI: Select Net Amount Calculation value on the Products tab.

t e r U s
Note: Net amount calculation is available for automatic price breaks with the Volume Type
equals to Item Amount (in HTML UI: Volume Based on = Item Amount).

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 173
Price Breaks: Net Amount Example

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Breaks: Net Amount Example

c l
Here is an example of net amount price breaks.

r a
In this scenario, three modifiers are defined, and will be applied to an order:

O ly
• Discount A: 40% discount in bucket 1.
• Discount B: 30% discount in bucket 1.

l & On
• The third modifier is an automatic price break using net amount calculation and Volume

2000.
n a e
Type equal to Item Amount. The break ranges are 5% for $0-1000 and 7% for $1000-

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 174
Price Breaks: Net Amount Example

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Breaks: Net Amount Example (continued)

c l
Now let us review the order. The list price for item AS54888 is $2000. The pricing engine will:

r a
• Calculate the Discount A and Discount B from the 1st buckets (from the list price) which
results in a 1400 discount.
O ly
• Since Price Break C is in bucket 2, the pricing engine will evaluate the net selling price

l & On
from bucket 1 to determine which break line to use. Since 2000-1400 is 600, this amount
qualifies for the first break line and the pricing engine returns a 5% discount.

n a e
• The discount will be 5% of 600, not 2000. So 2000-800-600-30=570.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 175
Accumulated Range Breaks

m y
d e
ca
e A
Accumulated Range Breaks

c l
Values can be accumulated across different orders or within an order. For example, suppose a

r a
customer places the following two orders:

O ly
• Order A: Orders 2 of Item “Shampoo”
• Order B: Orders 3 of Item “Shampoo”

l & On
Under regular range price break processing, each order would be evaluated independently of

n a e
each other. However, with accumulated range price breaks, the accumulated quantity value
from Order A is the starting point for evaluating the range break for Order B.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 176
Accumulated Range Breaks

m y
d e
ca
e A
Accumulated Range Breaks (continued)

c l
You can create two types of accumulation volume attributes in Attribute Management to use
this feature.
r a
O ly
• Use mapping method “Attribute Mapping” to source the accumulation value from the
pricing request.

l & On
• Use the new attribute mapping method ‘Runtime_Sourced’ to enable the pricing engine to
source the attribute and accumulation values from a custom API. A new package has been

n a e
created, QP_RUNTIME_SOURCE, containing a specification for the custom API.

t e r U s
Customers are required to write a corresponding body to this package. For more
information, see: Advanced Pricing Implementation Manual.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 177
Accumulated Range Breaks

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 178
Modifier Line: Start/End Dates

m y
d e
ca
e A
Modifier Line: Start/End Dates

c l
You can assign effective dates to define when the modifier is applicable (its effective period).

r a
Important: When a qualifier is attached to a price list or modifier header, the effective dates of

O ly
that qualifier determine the effective dates for the price list or modifier list, not the effective
dates defined in the price list or modifier list window.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 179
Modifier Line: Start/End Dates

m y
d e
ca
e A
Modifier Line: Start/End Dates (continued)

c l
The effective period of a modifier is especially useful when an organization is launching a

r a
special campaign for promoting some of its products. The effective period is also useful when
special charges or taxes are imposed on an item or a service for a certain period.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 180
Pricing Controls

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Controls

c l
Select the pricing controls to set rules to define how pricing applies actions.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 181
Controls: Implementation Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Implementation Considerations

c l
The interrelationship between pricing controls is an important factor to consider when setting

r a
up modifiers. For example, modifiers are linked to incompatibility groups that are linked to
phases. If you assign a modifier to an incompatibility group that is linked to a different phase
O ly
than is intended, the pricing engine may apply it at the wrong time giving an erroneous result.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 182
How Pricing Engine Processes Pricing Controls

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
How Pricing Engine Processes Pricing Controls
The pricing engine makes control selections from the top down. The engine processes each

r a
pricing request in the following sequence:

O ly
1. Events from the calling application.
2. Phases for the specified events.

l & On
3. Selects appropriate lines for the phase.

a e
4. Selects price list and modifiers that match qualifiers and pricing attributes rules.

n
t e
price, or exclusivity.r
5. Resolves incompatibility between price lists and modifier lists using precedence, best

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 183
Controls: Modifier Level

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Modifier Level

c l
The modifier level controls how a modifier behaves and what the engine evaluates when

r a
computing its effect. The Application Method you can select for a modifier line depends on the
modifier line type and level (line, group of lines, order) selected for the modifier line:
O ly
• Line: Applies the modifier at the order line

& On
• Group of Lines: Applies the modifier to a group of lines on the order
l
n a e
• Order: Applies the modifier to the entire order
For example, a volume-based discount modifier with a level of LINE will only consider the

t e r U s
volume of the line that qualifies for the modifier. However, a modifier giving a discount based
on volume with a GROUP OF LINES level will process the volume across all qualifying lines

I n
in the product hierarchy.
Note: Not all modifier types can be applied to all levels. Refer to the Oracle Advanced Pricing

l e
Implementation Manual for more information on the application methods that can be used with
c
various modifier levels.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 184
Controls: Pricing Phase

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 185
Pricing Phases

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Phases

c l
This table outlines the seeded event phases for pricing that integrate with Oracle Order

r a
Management--other event phases are associated with different Oracle applications.

O ly
A pricing event is associated with a pricing phase. All price lists are automatically assigned to
the seeded phase sequence 0 (List Line Base Price). Each event represents a point in the order

l & On
process flow at which the pricing engine is called to return a base price, price adjustments,
freight charges, promotions, benefits, and so on. The following list outlines the action that
initiates each event:
n a e
t e r U s
• Price event: Called after user enters item, quantity, and unit of measure
• Line event: Called when the user exits the order line

I n
• Order event: Called when the user saves the order
• Book event: Called when the user books the order

l e
• Ship event: Called by OM after the order is ship confirmed--when the field-shipped
c
r a quantity on the order line is updated with a value
• Reprice line: An event that the user inserts into the workflow activity. It is seeded in

O Pricing to occur after the order is shipped but before the order is invoiced. This event takes

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 186
place after the Ship event. Potentially, the user could set this up to run anytime during the
workflow.
Notes
Reprice Line: This event always passes just one order line being evaluated to the engine. That
means any order level/line group kind of discounts cannot be given in this event.
Accessibility Description
The table describes the relationship between events and their actions.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 187
Pricing Events

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Events

c l
A pricing event represents a point in a process that invokes the pricing engine. For example,

r a
the following events in Order Management invoke the pricing engine: enter order line, book
order, and reprice order.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 188
Seeded Phases Example

m y
d e
ca
e A
Seeded Phases Example

c l
The table displays seeded Phases. You need to decide if you want to add Additional Phases.

r a
All price lists are hardcoded to automatically be placed in the seeded Phase 0 - List Line Base
Price and cannot be assigned to any other phase.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 189
Phase and Event Implementation Decision

m y
d e
ca
e A
Phase and Event Implementation Decision

c l
Phases and events enable you to fine tune pricing. Since events break up the order cycle into

r a
distinct points in time to which you can attach pricing actions, it is possible to exercise control
over when and what pricing actions are taken.
O ly
Used correctly, this can improve performance. For example, if it is not necessary to calculate

l & On
pricing or view intermediate subtotals until an order is booked, as in the case of EDI orders,
you can set up the event/phase mapping to avoid calling the pricing engine repeatedly just to
process an order in batch.
n a e
t e r U s
You need to decide to which phases your discounts and/or promotions belong. For example,
you may decide to set up the following:

I n
• Place line level discounts in the List Line Adjustment phase
• Place modifiers that span multiple lines in the All Lines Adjustment phase

l e
• Place modifiers that apply to shipping in the Line charges phase
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 190
Event Phases

m y
d e
ca
e A
Event Phases

c l
When a certain event occurs, a call is made to the pricing engine. All the phases that are

r a
mapped to that event are executed at that time and returned to the requesting application. The
information returned by pricing can include base prices, price adjustments, promotions, or
O ly
freight charges depending on the event and the phases associated with that event.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 191
Event Phases: Line Event

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 192
Event Phases: Order Event

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 193
Event Phases: Book and Ship Events

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 194
Event Phases: Batch Event

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 195
Controls: Buckets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Buckets

c l
A bucket is a level introduced at each step of pricing. You assign different modifiers to various

r a
bucket levels to create cascading price adjustments. The modifiers assigned at each bucket
level are applied on the resultant amount of the previous bucket.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 196
Controls: Buckets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Buckets (continued)

c l
Consider an example where Vision Operations offers a 20-percent discount to its distributors.

r a
It imposes a 10-percent surcharge on the order amount. If a distributor places an order for an
item priced $1,000, the price specified for the distributor is $800.
O ly
When the Surcharge modifier is assigned to a Level-2 bucket, the pricing engine first applies

l & On
the Level-1 bucket modifier (order total of $800) then applies the Level-2 bucket modifier
(10% surcharge on the $800 order so the distributor pays $880).

n a e
If both modifiers are contained within the same Level-1 bucket, the pricing engine applies each

t e r U s
modifier to the original base price—not the discounted price. This is how the final order cost of
the single bucket use is calculated:

I n
Level-1 bucket: Order amount ($1000) * Discount modifier (20%) = $800
Level-1 bucket: Surcharge modifier (10%) * order amount ($1000) = $100

l e
Total of buckets = $900
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 197
Buckets: Implementation Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 198
Buckets: Implementation Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
Buckets: Implementation Considerations

c l
Whether to define additional buckets, and how many you need is a key implementation

r a
decision. You can use pricing buckets to control how you sequence your calculation of
discounts and other benefits. You can get different net selling prices depending on how you
can group.
O ly
l & On
Tip: A useful way to calculate how many buckets are required is to review the client’s invoice.
Count the subtotals with beginning list price being the first, and final net price being the last

a e
and adding the number in between.
n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 199
Null Buckets

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 200
Buckets For Manual Modifiers

m y
d e
ca
e A
Buckets for Manual Modifiers

c l
In prior releases, cascading adjustments using buckets was available for only automatic line

r a
level and group of lines level modifiers.

O ly
Now manual modifiers can be used in cascading adjustments. Once the profile QP: Allow
Buckets for Manual Modifiers is set to ‘Yes,’ you can then define a bucket value for manual

l & On
modifiers. These modifier types include discounts, surcharges, price breaks, and freight and
special charges. Manual adjustments are applied after automatic adjustments within the same

a e
bucket. Once a bucketed manual adjustment is applied, adjustments in subsequent buckets are
n
Advanced Pricing users.
t e r U s
recalculated. This feature is supported in both Forms and HTML, and is available only for

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 201
Practice - Creating Modifier Lines with Multiple Buckets
Overview
In this practice, you will create a modifier and define modifier lines using multiple buckets. Then
you create a sales order and apply the modifier to observe how bucketed discounts are applied.
Your customer is eligible (qualifies) for four different discounts and a surcharge:

• Three 10% discounts will be applied when the order has been entered and saved.

• A $13 surcharge and a 5% discount will be applied when the order is booked.

• The first two 10% discounts are added together and applied to the defaulting price.

• The third 10% discount and $13 surcharge are to be applied to the resulting price.

• The 5% discount will then be deducted from the result.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility


m y
• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.
d e

ca
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

e A
Tasks
c l
Creating Modifier Lines
r a
O ly
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1.
l & On
Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

n a e
r
2. In the Main tab:
− Type = Discount List

t e U s
− Number = XX-Discount List 2

I n
− Active = Deselected
− Automatic = Selected

l e
− Name = XX-Discount List 2
c
− Version = Optional

r a − Start Date = Optional

O − Description = Tiered Discount Modifier

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 202
− Currency = USD

3. Click List Qualifiers. When the Qualifier List appears, click OK and create the following
qualifiers:

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Operator Value From


Number Context Attribute

1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

1 Modifier List Price List = XX-Price List 4

4. Click OK.

5. For the table below, save your work after entering each modifier.

6. In the Modifiers Summary tab, Discounts/Charges sub-tab:

Modifier Level Modifier Pricing Phase Bucket Application Value


Number Type Method
1 Line Discount 10 (List Line
Adjustment)
1 Percent 10

m y
2 Line Discount 10 (List Line 1 Percent
d
10
e
3 Line Discount
Adjustment)
10 (List Line 2
c
Percent a 10

e
Adjustment)
A
4 Line Surcharge

c l 80 (Modifiers
for BOOK
2 Lumpsum 13

5 Line Discount
r a Event)
80 (Modifiers 3 Percent 5

O ly for BOOK

& On
Event)

7. l
a e
Return to the Main Header of the Modifier and select the Active check box.

8. Click Save.
r n s
n t e U
Creating a Sales Order Using Modifier with Multiple Buckets

e I
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

c l
9.

r a Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

O10. In the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 203
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup.
− Price List = XX-Price List 4

11. In the Line Items tab, Main sub-tab:


− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Case
− Quantity = 1

Note that the default value in the Unit Selling Price field is $100.

12. Save your order and note the order number _____________.

Note the new price in the Unit Selling Price field. The value should be $72.

13. Click Actions > View Adjustments to confirm that all three 10% discounts are applied.

14. Click Cancel.

15. Click Book Order. A notification displays stating that the order is booked

16. Click OK.

17. Click Line Items. Note the new price in the Unit Selling Price field. The value should be
$80.75.

m y
18. Click Actions > View Adjustments to confirm that all five modifiers (four discounts and one
surcharge) are applied.
d e
19. Click Cancel.
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 204
Solution - Creating Modifier Lines with Multiple Buckets
Creating Modifier Lines

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. (T) Main:
− Type = Discount List
− Number = XX-Discount List 2
− Active = Deselected
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Discount List 2
− Version = Optional
− Start Date = Optional
− Description = Tiered Discount Modifier
− Currency = USD

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O3. (B) List Qualifiers. When the Qualifier List appears, (B) OK and create the following
qualifiers:
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 205
Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Operator Value From
Number Context Attribute

1 Customer Customer Name = XX-Big City Electronics

1 Modifier List Price List = XX-Price List 4

m y
4. (B) OK.
d e
5. For the table below, (I) Save your work after entering each modifier.
c a
6.
e
(T) Modifiers Summary, (T) Discounts/Charges: A
c l
Modifier Level
r a
Modifier Pricing Phase Bucket Application Value
Number
O ly
Type Method

& On
1 Line Discount 10 (List Line 1 Percent 10

2 Line l
a e
Discount
Adjustment)
10 (List Line 1 Percent 10

r n s
Adjustment)
3 Line

n t e Discount
U
10 (List Line
Adjustment)
2 Percent 10

e I
Line Surcharge 80 (Modifiers 2 Lumpsum 13

c l for BOOK
Event)

O ra
5 Line Discount 80 (Modifiers
for BOOK
Event)
3 Percent 5

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 206
m y
7. Return to the Main Header of the Modifier and select the Active check box.

d e
8. (I) Save.

ca
Creating a Sales Order Using Modifier with Multiple Buckets

e A
l
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

c
9. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
r a

O ly
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

10. (T) Order Information, (T) Main


l & On
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

n a e
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup.

t e r U s
− Price List = XX-Price List 4

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 207
m y
11. (T) Line Items, (T) Main:
− Ordered Item = XX-Palm Case
d e
− Quantity = 1

ca
Note that the default value in the Unit Selling Price field is $100.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 208
m y
12. (I) Save your order and note the order number _____________.

d e
Note the new price in the Unit Selling Price field. The value should be $72.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 209
m y
13. (B) Actions > View Adjustments to confirm that all three 10% discounts are applied.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 210
14. (B) Cancel.

15. (B) Book Order. A notification displays stating that the order is booked

16. (B) OK.

17. (T) Line Items. Note the new price in the Unit Selling Price field. The value should be
$80.75.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
18. (B) Actions > View Adjustments to confirm that all five modifiers (four discounts and one
surcharge) are applied.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 211
19. (B) Cancel.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 212
Practice - Creating a Manual Overrideable Discount
Overview
In this practice, you will observe how the Override check box (when selected) enables you
to manually change the percent (or amount) value when applying a modifier in a sales order.
There are two methods to manually override a unit-selling price:

• Method 1: Override the value in the unit price field.

• Method 2: In Actions > View Adjustments, enter a value for the discount and click
apply:
− You can restrict manual modifiers to specific attributes and periods of time.
− You can apply a manual discount at list line level or all lines level.
− The “Order Type” must allow override of a selling price.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility


Order Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility

Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.


m y

d e
a
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training

Tasks
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

A c
Creating the Manual Overrideable Modifier
c l e
r a
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. O ly
Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

2.
l & On
Enter the following values in the Define Modifier window:
− Type = Discount List
n a e
t e r s
− Number = XX-Manual Override
− Active = Deselected to start
U
I n
− Automatic = Deselected
− Name = XX-Manual Override

l e
− Version = 1

c
− Start Date = Default

r a − Description = Manual Discount with no Qualifiers

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 213
3. Enter the following values in the Discounts/Charges tab. If the Organization window opens,
select M1.

Modifier Level Modifier Automatic Override Pricing Incomp.


Number Type Phase Group
XX-MO Line Discount Deselected Selected 10 (List blank
Line
Adjustment)

4. (T) Discounts/Charges (continued).

Bucket Application Method Value


Blank Percent 0

5. Save your work.

6. Return to the main header of the modifier, and select the Active check box.

Creating a Sales Order Using a Manual Discount

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)


m y
7. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
d e
8. In the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:
c a
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
e A
− Price List = XX-Price List 5
c l
9. In the Line Items tab:
r a
O ly
Ordered Item
& On
Quantity

l
a e
XX-Phone 1

r n s
10. Save your work and note your order number ________________.

n t e U
11. Select Actions > View Adjustments.

e I
12. In the Adjustments window (Adjustments tab):
l
− Modifier Number = XX-Manual Override
c
r a Notice that the Rate field allows updates (is not greyed out). You could enter and apply a

O value in this field, but for this exercise we will change the price manually in the Unit Selling
Price field in the order window. Cancel the Adjustment swindow.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 214
13. In the Unit Selling Price field, enter a price that is 10% lower than the current unit selling
price.

14. Select the XX-Manual Override in the find window and click OK.

15. Click Save.

16. Select Actions > View Adjustments. Notice that the Rate of the modifier changed from 0 to
10 (percent).

17. Close Adjustments window.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 215
Solution - Creating a Manual Overrideable Discount
Creating the Manual Overrideable Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

• (N) Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. Enter the following values:


− Type = Discount List
− Number = XX-Manual Override
− Active = Deselected to start
− Automatic = Deselected
− Name = XX-Manual Override
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default
− Description = Manual Discount with no Qualifiers

3. (T) Discount/Charges. If the Organization window opens, select M1.

m y
Modifier Level Modifier Automatic Override Pricing Incomp.
d e
Number
XX-MO
Type
Line Discount Deselected Selected
Phase
10 (List
Group

c
blank a
e
Line
Adjustment) A
4. (T) Discounts/Charges (continued).
c l
r a
Bucket O ly
Application Method Value
Blank Percent
l & On 0

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 216
m y
5. (I) Save.

d e
6. Return to the main header of the modifier, and select the Active check box.

ca
Creating a Sales Order Using a Manual Discount

e A
l
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

c
7.
r
Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
a

O ly
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

8.
l & On
(T) Order Information, (T) Main:

n a e
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup

t e r U s
− Price List = XX-Price List 5

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 217
m y
9. (T) Line Items:

d e
Ordered Item Quantity
ca
XX-Phone 1

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 218
m y
10. (I) Save. Note your order number ________________.

d e
11. (B) Actions > View Adjustments.

ca
12. In the Adjustments window (Adjustments tab):
− Modifier Number = XX-Manual Override
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 219
Notice that the Rate field allows updates (is not greyed out). You could enter and apply a
m y
Price field in the order window. Close the Adjustments window.
d e
value in this field, but for this exercise we will change the price manually in the Unit Selling

ca
13. In the Unit Selling Price field, enter a price that is 10% lower than the current unit selling
price.

e A
l
14. Select the XX-Manual Override in the find window and click (B) OK.
c
15. (I) Save.
r a
O ly
16. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. Notice that the Rate of the modifier changed from 0 to 10
(percent).

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 220
17. Close Adjustments window.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 221
Cascading Modifier: Single Bucket

m y
d e
ca
e A
Cascading Modifier: Single Bucket

c l
In this example, each discount is assigned to the same pricing bucket (bucket 1). If the

r a
modifiers are contained within the same Level-1 bucket, the pricing engine applies each
modifier to the original base price—not to the discounted price.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 222
Cascading Modifier: Multiple Buckets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Cascading Modifier: Multiple Buckets

c l
In this example, the discounts are assigned to different pricing buckets. All modifiers in the

r a
Level-1 bucket are applied to the original base price—modifiers in subsequent buckets are
applied to discounted price from the previous bucket adjustments.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 223
Controls: Incompatibility

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Incompatibility

c l
Incompatible modifiers are modifiers that you do not want a pricing engine to apply together to

r a
an order. For example, Vision operations applies a 5-percent surcharge to distributors paying
after 30 days but it also offers a 10-percent discount to distributors who place an order amount
O ly
greater than $50,000. A distributor could be given either the surcharge or the discount if the

l & On
distributor pays after 30 days AND places an order more than $50,000.
To prevent the application of incompatible modifiers to an order, you assign incompatible

a e
modifiers to different incompatibility levels. A pricing engine applies modifiers in a single
n
t e r
incompatibility level to an order.

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 224
Controls: Incompatibility Groups Implementation Decisions

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Controls: Incompatibility Groups Implementation Decisions
Incompatibility groups only work in a phase. If you have two discounts in the same

r a
incompatibility group, but one is a line phase and the other a line group phase, the engine will
not treat them as incompatible. To prevent the application of incompatible modifiers to an
O ly
order, you assign incompatible modifiers to different incompatibility levels. A pricing engine

& On
applies modifiers in a single incompatibility level to an order.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 225
Controls: Determining Incompatibility Groups

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 226
Cascading Modifier Example – Incompatibility Levels

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Cascading Modifier Example – Incompatibility Levels
Incompatibility groups only work in a phase. To prevent the application of multiple modifiers

r a
to an order, you can assign modifiers to different incompatibility levels. A pricing engine
applies modifiers in a single incompatibility level to an order. When you use incompatibility,
O ly
you must have in place a scheme for resolving which incompatible modifier will be selected in
any given engine call.
Table Key
l & On
• Bkt: Bucket
n a e
• Prc: Precedence
t e r U s
• Inc Lvl: Incompatibility Levels

I n
• Dis: Amt: Discount Amount

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 227
Practice - Resolving Group Modifier Incompatibilities
Overview
You now decide that some customers, including XX-Big City Electronics, should only receive
two of the 10% discounts along with the $13 surcharge and the 5% discount.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Creating Modifier Lines

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations


m y
1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
d e
2. Query your modifier#: XX-Discount List 2
ca
3.
e
Enter the following information in the Modifiers Summary tab: A
c l
Modifier No.
r a
Incompatibility Group (LOV) Precedence
1
O ly
Level 1 Incompatibility 200
2
& On
Level 1 Incompatibility

l
100

4. Click Save.
n a e
e r s
Creating a Sales Order Using Incompatibility Resolution
t U
I n
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

l e
Note: Instead of creating a new order, as shown below, you could find and re-price the

c
Sales Order you previously created to test the XX-Tiered Discount modifier.

r
5. a Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 228
6. In the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:
− Customer: XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List: XX-Price List 4

7. In the Line Items tab, Main sub-tab:

Ordered Item Quantity


XX-Palm Case 1

The default price in the Unit Selling Price field should be $100.

8. Save your order and note the order number _____________.

Note that the new price in the Unit Selling Price field is $81.

9. Click Actions > View Adjustments. Confirm that only two 10% discounts are applied.

10. Click Cancel.

11. Click Book Order. A notification displays stating that the order is booked.

12. Click OK..


m y
13. Click Line Items. The new price in the Unit Selling Price field is $89.30.
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 229
Solution - Resolving Group Modifier Incompatibilities
Creating Modifier Lines

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

• (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. Query your modifier#: XX-Discount List 2

3. (T) Modifiers Summary. Add Level 1 Incompatibility and Precedence:

Modifier No. Incompatibility Group Precedence


1 Level 1 Incompatibility 200
2 Level 1 Incompatibility 100

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
4.

O ra
(I) Save.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 230
Creating a Sales Order Using Incompatibility Resolution

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

Note: Instead of creating a new order, as shown below, you could find and re-price the Sales
Order you previously created to test the XX-Tiered Discount modifier.

5. (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

6. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:


− Customer: XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List: XX-Price List 4

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
7. (T) Line Items, (T) Main:
n a e
t e r U s
Ordered Item
I n Quantity
XX-Palm Case

c l e 1

r a The default price in the Unit Selling Price field should be $100

O8. (I) Save your order and note the order number _____________.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 231
m y
Note that the new price in the Unit Selling Price field is $81.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 232
m y
9. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. Confirm that only two 10% discounts are applied.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 233
10. (B) Cancel.

11. (B) Book Order. A notification displays stating that the order is booked.

12. (B) OK..

13. (T) Line Items. The new price in the Unit Selling Price field is $89.30.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 234
Controls: Resolving Modifier Incompatibility

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controls: Resolving Modifier Incompatibility

c l
You can resolve incompatibilities by setting the Incompatibility Resolve Code field in the

r a
Event Phases window to either Precedence or Best Price.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 235
Best Price

m y
d e
ca
e A
Best Price

c l
You can use the Best Price method to have the pricing engine select the modifier that provides
the best price to the customer.
r a
O ly
Enter a numeric value in the Comparison Value field in the Modifier window for best price
resolution for Promotional Goods, Other Item Discount, Item Upgrade, Coupon Issue, and
Term Substitution.
Notes:
l & On
n a e
• The pricing engine does not consider modifiers with formulas for best price calculation.

t e r U s
• Cannot be used for price list lines.
• Cannot be used with the following order-level modifier list types:
- Discount
I n
l e
- Surcharge

c
- Freight and Special Charges

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 236
Best Price

m y
d e
ca
e A
Best Price (continued)

c l
If there is more than one modifier with the lowest precedence in an Incompatibility level, the

r a
pricing engine uses the best price method. In these situations, the pricing engine selects the
modifier that provides the best price to the customer.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 237
Exclusivity: Implementation Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 238
Exclusivity

m y
d e
ca
e A
Exclusivity

c l
If a modifier is marked exclusive, the pricing engine ignores the precedence and the best price

r a
and applies only the exclusive modifier.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 239
Create Product

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 240
Define Product

m y
d e
ca
e A
Define Product

c l
On the Product page (HTML UI), you can define the product to be evaluated for the benefit.

r a
You can specify any pricing attributes or volume requirements (if applicable) for the product.

O ly
Depending on the modifier line type, the product and benefit information is set up on the same
page, or on separate pages (first the Product page, followed by the Benefit page). After

& On
defining the product, you can define the benefit.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 241
Product: Excluded Products

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 242
Precedence Value

m y
d e
ca
e A
Precedence Value

c l
Using precedence, a pricing engine applies the modifier with the greatest precedence to a

r a
pricing request. Precedence is the sequence in which a pricing engine retrieves modifiers.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 243
Precedence Number

m y
d e
ca
e A
Precedence Number

c l
The lower the numeric value, the higher its precedence, so a precedence value of 1 is selected

r a
before 2 and so on. The precedence number (or value) for the precedence displays in the:

O ly
• Define Modifier window (Forms-based UI)
• Products page (HTML UI)

l & On
For example, if there are two modifiers--a modifier with precedence number 200 and another

precedence value of 50.


n a e
modifier with a precedence of 50--then the pricing engine applies the modifier with the

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 244
Define Benefit

m y
d e
ca
e A
Define Benefit

c l
After defining the product, you can define the benefit. Depending on the modifier line type, the

r a
benefit may be set up in a single page or two separate pages (HTML UI).

O ly
This may be the discount or surcharge adjustment, free good products, or price break. After
defining the benefit, you have the option to add line qualifiers to the modifier by assigning

l
your setup before saving the line.& On
existing qualifier groups or adding qualifiers. On the last page of the flow, you can review all

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 245
Modifier Adjustment Methods

m y
d e
ca
e A
Modifier Adjustment Methods

c l
The Adjustment Method determines how the modifier applies the price adjustment. The

r a
adjustment method you can select depends on the Level selected for that modifier line such as
Order, Line, or Group of Lines. You can select from the following adjustment methods:
O ly
• Amount: Creates a fixed price adjustment on each unit for the amount specified in the
value field.

l & On
• Lumpsum: Creates a price adjustment for the entire sum amount of the line.

n a e
• New Price: Overrides the selling price of the item and makes it the new price.

t e r U
specified in the value field. s
• Percentage: Creates a percentage price adjustment on each unit for the percentage

I n
Note: In the Forms-based UI, the Adjustment Method is known as the Application Method.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 246
Modifier Implementation Considerations: Accruals

m y
d e
ca
e A
Accruals can be applied as a:
c l
Modifier Implementation Considerations: Accruals

• Percent
r a
• Amount
• Lump sum O ly
l & On
Accrual conversion rate example: If one air mile is 0.50 currency units, the accrual conversion

n a e
rate is 0.50.The Level field controls how a modifier behaves and what the engine looks at in
computing its effect. You can select from available application methods depending on the

t e r U s
modifier line type and level selected:
• Line: Applies the modifier at the order line

I n
• Group of Lines: Applies the modifier to a group of lines on the order

l e
• Order: Applies the modifier to the entire order

c
For example, a volume-based discount modifier with a level of LINE will only consider the

r a
volume of the line that that qualifies for the modifier. However, a modifier giving a discount
based on volume with a GROUP OF LINES level will accumulate the volume across all the

O lines that share this level in the product hierarchy that qualifies for the discount.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 247
Note: Not all modifier types can be applied to all levels. Refer to the Oracle Advanced Pricing
Implementation Manual for more information on the application methods that can be used with
various modifier levels.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 248
Overview of Promotional Limits

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of Promotional Limits

c l
Enables you to set limits for benefits that a customer can receive for a promotion, deal, or other

r a
modifier. By limiting the amount of a benefit that can be received, you can keep promotional
spending within budget and prevent promotion budget overruns.
O ly
Within a promotion, deal, or modifier, you can also set eligibility for limits by customer,
product, or other entity:

l & On
• Customer: Define a limit by customer, a group of customers, or at any level in your
customer hierarchy.
n a e
t e r U s
• Product: Define a limit for a product or group of products in your product hierarchy.
Note: System Administrator must set QP: Promotional Limits Installed to Yes.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 249
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)

m y
d e
ca
e A
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)

c l
When setting up limits in the Define Limits window, you select a Basis that defines the type of

r a
limit and how the consumption is measured.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 250
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)

m y
d e
ca
e A
Types of Limits (Limit Basis) (continued)

c l
When setting up promotional limits, you can select the limit type in the Basis field. This

r a
Indicates the basis on which the limit is calculated. Select from the following limit basis:

O ly
• Accrual Units: For example, each customer accrues 100 air miles for each 10 currency
units spent up to a limit of 5,000 air miles per customer.

& On
• Charge Amount: The sum (charge amount) by modifier.
l
n a e
• Cumulative Discount Amount: For example, when the cost of the promotion has exceeded
$50,000, the promotion ends. For example, if the budget available for the discount of 10%

t e
the limit is reached. r U s
on the Orange Juice product family is $100k, this discount should be made inactive when

I n
• Gross Revenue: For example, each customer receives the promotion for the first $250 that
they order from the website.

l e
• Item Quantity: For example, a customer receives $10 off a case of 12 one-gallon cans of
c
orange juice for the first 1,000 cases.

r a
• Usage: Usage can be based by customer, promotion, or both customer and promotion

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 251
When a pricing request is processed, the pricing engine checks each request against the limit to
see if it exceeds the limit and applies the amount of the benefit against the limit.
Note: Limit basis types are defined in lookup type QP_LIMIT_BASIS.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 252
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 253
Types of Limits (Limit Basis)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 254
Other Attributes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Other Attributes

c l
From the Define Limits block, select Other Attributes button to enter limits by specific values
for customers or products.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 255
Actions to Control Exceeded Limits

m y
d e
ca
e A
Actions to Control Exceeded Limits

c l
You will be able to specify whether it is a hard or soft limit by setting the profile QP: Limit

r a
Exceed Action to either Hard–Adjust Benefit Amount or Soft–Full Benefit Amount. This profile
can be set at the user level.
O ly
• If the limit is defined as a hard limit, and the benefit amount exceeds the available

l & On
balance, the pricing engine will adjust the benefit amount on the transaction by the
remaining available balance at which time no further benefit is available to anyone.

n a e
• If the limit is defined as a soft limit, and the benefit amount exceeds the available balance,

t e r U s
the pricing engine will apply the full amount of the benefit to the transaction but indicate
to the calling application that the benefit has been exceeded.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 256
Hard Limit

m y
d e
ca
e A
Hard Limit

c l
If the limit is defined as a hard limit, and the benefit amount exceeds the available balance, the

r a
pricing engine will adjust the benefit amount on the transaction by the remaining available
balance at which time no further benefit is available to anyone.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 257
Soft Limit

m y
d e
ca
e A
Soft Limit

c l
Soft limits enable you to monitor your promotions while continuously giving the benefit. When

r a
a soft limit is exceeded, pricing will still apply the benefit (on subsequent orders) even if the
total limit has been exceeded. Since pricing returns a status message that the limit has been
O ly
exceeded, you must decide what further action should be taken: increase the limit, end date or

& On
inactivate the modifier, add qualifiers, or cancel the order.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 258
Limits: Viewing Transactions

m y
d e
ca
e A
Limits: Viewing Transactions

c
For a limit, you will be able to view the:l
r a
• Amount of the limit, which has been consumed
• Amount still available
O ly
• Date on which the limit started to be consumed

l & On
• Date on which the limit was exceeded
• Line Limits

n a e
t e r U s
• Basis Types (how the limit is defined; for example, by Charge Amount or Gross Revenue)
• Other Attribute functionality in Limit

I n
• Enforced within transaction
• When Exceeded (different actions when a limit is exceeded)

l e
You will see details of the transactions that have consumed the balance against limit, including,
c
r a
• Transaction Type, Transaction Amount, Transaction Date
• Source applications like Oracle Order Management, Oracle Order Capture etc.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 259
Limits: Exceptions

m y
d e
ca
e A
Limits: Exceptions

c l
For a Modifier List to have a List limit, it must have at least one Modifier line for which a line
limit can be created.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 260
Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Promotional Limits
Overview
Your Marketing Department wants to create a 10% order level promotion for the first 25
customers with a limit of one order per customer. In this practice, you will create a modifier and
define limits for that modifier. Then you apply the modifier to a sales order.

Note: Limits can be created for the following modifier list types: Discount, Surcharge,
Promotion or Freight and special Charge. It is not mandatory to have Promotion as the modifier
list type.

Assumptions
• Order Management Super User responsibility

• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
m y
Creating the Modifier

d e
You first must define the promotion by setting up the promotion modifier.
ca
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

e A
2.
l
In the Main tab enter the following modifier list information:
− Type = Promotion
c
r
− Number = XX-Promotional Limita
O ly
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected

− Version = 1 l & On
− Name = XX-Promotional Limit 1

n
− Start Date = Default a e
t e r
− Currency =Defaults

U s
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

I n
Creating a List Qualifier

3.
c l e
Click List Qualifiers to add the following qualifier criteria (if the Qualifier Groups window

r a displays, click OK):

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 261
Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Operator Value From
Number Context Attribute
1 Modifier List Price List = XX-Price List 1

4. Click OK.

5. In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter the following modifier line information:
− Modifier No = 1
− Level = Order
− Modifier Type = Discount
− Start Date/End Date = Optional
− Automatic = Selected
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment
− Incompatibility Level = Blank
− Bucket = Blank

Note: The Override check box should not be selected for limits.

6. In the Discounts/Charges tab, enter the following information:


− Application Method = Percent
− Value = 10

7. Save your work.


m y
8. Click List Limits (in the modifier list header).
d e
9. Enter the following limits:
c a
e A
Basis Enforced Amount
l
Constraint 1
c
Context 1 Attribute 1 When

Usage Across All 1


r aQualifier Customer Customer
Exceeded
Hard-Adjust Benefit
Transactions
O lyAttribute Name Amount

Usage Across All


Transactions
25

l & On Qualifier Order Request Hard-Adjust Benefit


Amount

a e
Attribute Date

r n s
10. Save your work and close the window.

n t e U
11. Navigate to the modifier header region, and select the Active check box.

e I
Creating a Sales Order Using the Discount Modifier With Promotional Limits

c l
12. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

r a
13. Enter the following in the Main tab:
O − Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 262
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price List1

14. In Line Items tab, Main sub-tab, enter the following:

Line Number Ordered Item Quantity


1.1 XX- Palm Pilot 1
2.1 AS54888 1

15. Save your work.

16. Each Item should receive a 10% discount.

17. Repeat steps 11 to 15 to create a new order for the same customer. Because of the
promotional limits, you should not receive the 10% discount on this second order. The limits
were for one customer. We also set a limit of 25 total orders (one per customer) but we will
not test that.

Note: Review the balances to confirm that each customer has consumed the limit.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 263
Solution - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Promotional Limits
Create a Discount Modifier with Promotional Limits

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. (T) Main tab


− Type = Promotion
− Number = XX-Promotional Limit
− Active = Deselected (to start)
− Automatic = Selected
− Name = XX-Promotional Limit 1
− Version = 1
− Start Date = Default
− Currency =Defaults
− Description = Enter a meaningful description

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 264
Creating a List Qualifier

3. (B) List Qualifiers:

Grouping Qualifier Qualifier Precedence Operator Value From


Number Context Attribute
1 Modifier List Price List Defaults = XX-Price List 1

m y
d e
4. (B) OK.
c a
5. (T) Main, (T) Modifiers Summary:

e A
− Modifier No = Defaults
− Level = Order
c l
− Modifier Type = Discount
r
− Start Date/End Date = Optionala
− Automatic = Selected
O ly
& On
− Pricing Phase = All Lines Adjustment

l
a e
Note: The Override check box should not be selected for limits.

n
6.
e r s
(T) Discounts/Charges tab. Define the discount:

t U
− Application Method = Percent
− Value = 10
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 265
m y
7. Save your work.

d e
Creating the Limits

c a
8. (B) List Limits (at the modifier list header). Enter the following limits:

e A
Basis Enforced Amount
c l
Constraint Context 1 Attribute 1 When Exceeded

r a 1

Usage Across All


Transactions
1
O lyQualifier Customer Customer
Name
Hard-Adjust
Benefit Amount

Usage Across All 25


l & On Attribute
Qualifier Order Request Hard-Adjust
Transactions

n a e Attribute Date Benefit Amount

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 266
9. (I) Save.
m y
10. Navigate to the modifier header region, and select the Active check box.
d e
11. Save your work and close the window.
ca
e
Creating a Sales Order Using the Discount Modifier With Promotional Limits A
c l
a
12. Navigate to the Sales Order window.

• r
O ly
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

13. (T) Order Information, (T) Main

l & On
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

a e
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
n
t e r
− Order Type = Standard
s
− Price List = XX-Price List 1
U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 267
m y
14. (T) Line Items, Main (T)

d e
Line
Number
Ordered Item Quantity

ca
1.1 XX- Palm Pilot 1

e A
2.1 AS54888 1

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 268
15. (I) Save.
m y
16. Each Item should receive a 10% discount.
d e
• (B) Actions > View Adjustments.
ca
e A
17. Repeat steps 12 to 14 to create a new order for the same customer. Because of the
l
promotional limits, the customer should not receive the 10% discount on this second order.
c
r a
A customer can only get the discount once as defined in the limits setup. We also set a limit
of 25 total orders (one per customer) but we will not test that.

O ly
Note: Review the balances to confirm that each customer has consumed the limit.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 269
Pricing Organizer

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 270
Practice - Finding and Reviewing Modifiers Using the Pricing
Organizer
Overview
In this practice, you will use the pricing organizer to find and review modifiers.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1.

2.
Navigate to the Pricing Organizer window.

In the Header tab:


m y
− Number = XX%
d e
3. Click Find.
ca
A
This will find all of the modifiers that you created in class and place them in the Pricing

e
Organizer where you can do the following:

c l

a
Save the query in the left side of the window. (Select Search Results folder, and right-

r
click your mouse to save your query.)

• O ly
Use folders on the right side of the window to customize the appearance.


l & On
Review all of your modifiers.

n a e


t e r U s
Click the Open Modifier button to update an individual modifier.

n
Click the New Modifier button to create a new modifier.

I
Notes:

c
• l e
You can query modifier lists or individual modifier lines.

r a • Try searching by other criteria such as certain products, qualifiers, and so on.
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 271
Solution - Finding and Reviewing Modifiers Using the Pricing
Organizer
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Pricing Organizer window.

• (N) Pricing > Pricing Organizer

2. (T) Header:
− Number = XX%

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
3. (B) Find.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 272
m y
d e
ca
4.
A
This will find all of the modifiers that you created in class and place them in the Pricing
Organizer where you can do the following:
e

c l
Save the query in the left side of the window.

• r a
Use folders on the right side of the window to customize the appearance
O ly

& On
Review all of your modifiers.

l

a e
Click the Open Modifier button to update an individual modifier.

n

r s
Click the New Modifier button to create a new modifier.

t e U
Notes:
I n

c l e
You can query Modifier Lists or individual Modifier Lines.

r a • Try searching by other criteria such as certain products, qualifiers, and so on.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 273
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 274
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 275
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Modifiers
Chapter 6 - Page 276
Price Books

y
Chapter 7

em
a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 2
Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 4
Overview of Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of Price Books

c l
A price book is a pricing report that displays item list and net prices (for a specific customer)

r a
based on a specific pricing date. Within the price book, you can view details of the list price,
discounts, surcharges, price breaks, and freight and special charges. The price book supports
O ly
formula-based prices, and you can view price break and pricing attribute details. Customer

l & On
Item and numbers are also visible within the price book.
Freight and special charges: Although freight and special charges do not affect the unit selling

a e
price in Advanced Pricing, they will affect the net price in the price book.
n
t e r U s
Pricing buckets: If pricing buckets have been defined for any modifiers, the modifiers will be
displayed in the order of the pricing buckets, with the null bucket modifiers displayed last

I n
From the online view, you can view any price break details or any pricing attributes used in the

l e
price calculation. Pricing errors (such as missing pricing attribute for formula processing or

c
duplicate prices) are also displayed on a separate page.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 5
Overview of Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 6
Overview of Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 7
Types of Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
Types of Price Books
You can create two types of price books:
c l
r a
• A full price book contains all items and associated prices as of a specific pricing effective
date.
O ly
• A delta price book is generated by specifying a new pricing effective date, and displays

l & On
any delta changes in items or prices based on an existing full price book of the same name,
for the same customer, and with all other input criteria remaining the same.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 8
Price Book Example 1

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 9
Price Book Example 2

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 10
Price Book Example 3

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 11
Benefits of Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 12
Price Book Implementation

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 13
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 14
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options

m y
d e
ca
e A
QP: E-mail - From Address
c l
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options

r a
You need to set up the profile option QP: E-mail - From Address to specify the From Email

O ly
Address for any e-mails that are sent from the price book feature. When the price book is e-
mailed, the recipient can identify the sender and respond to the sender’s return e-mail address.

l & On
There is no default value for the profile option and can be updated at the Site and User level.
Important: Publishing a price book to a printer or as an e-mail attachment and creation of the

n a e
View Document (formatted document) is dependent on the availability of the Delivery Server

t e r U s
Component of the Oracle XML Publisher (XDO) product.
QP: External Default Pricing Perspective

I n
This profile option sets the default pricing perspective for all external users. The value defaults
to the Pricing Perspective field in the Create Price Book page. This profile can be set at the site

l e
or user level and the default value is Order Management Order.

c
QP: Inbound XML Messaging Responsibility

r a
This profile option is used at the application or user level to set the responsibility context for an

O inbound XML message request for a price book (a Get Catalog XML message). This profile

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 15
option is used to associate a Responsibility at the Application or User level. There is no default
value for this profile option.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 16
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options

m y
d e
ca
e A
QP: Internal Default Pricing Perspective
c l
Implementation Steps: Setting Key Profile Options

r a
This profile sets the default value for the pricing perspective for all internal users using the

O ly
price book feature. The values can be applications like Oracle Order Management or Oracle
Purchasing that request information from the pricing application. The Pricing Perspective field

l & On
in the Create Price Book page displays the default value; however, an internal user can
override this value by selecting a different pricing perspective. This profile can be set at the site

a e
level only and default value is Order Management Order
n
t e r U s
Note: Oracle Advanced Pricing is not one of the valid values for this profile option.
QP: Pricing Perspective Request Type

I n
This profile option is used for the price book feature to map the Pricing Perspective to the
Request type calling the price book. It can be set at system administrator site and system

l e
administration application levels. The default value at the site level is Order Management
Order.
c
r a
Note: External users cannot view or change the Pricing Perspective field. The value PO
(Oracle Purchasing) is valid for internal users but not external users.
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 17
Implementation Steps: Verifying Pricing Parameters

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Implementation Steps: Verifying Pricing Parameters
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager > Setup > Attribute Management > Pricing Transaction Entity
Associations
r a
O ly
(N) Oracle Pricing Administrator > Oracle Pricing Administrator Setup : Parameters>
Parameter Values

l & On
The next setup step is to verify the values for the pricing parameter Price Book Pricing Events.
Based on the values specified in the profile QP: Pricing Perspective Request Type, each calling

n a e
pricing perspective has an associated request type. The Price Book Pricing Events parameter

t e r U
engine to generate a price book.s
determines which pricing event or events are used for each request type to call the pricing

values are:
I n
Multiple events may be entered separated by commas; for example, BATCH, BOOK. Seeded

l e
• CMRO: Batch

c
• Order Capture: Batch

r a• FTE: FTE Price Line

O • Intercompany: IC Batch

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 18
• Demand Planning: Batch
• Contracts: Batch
• Contracts for Service: Batch
• Order Management: Batch
• Purchase Order: PO Batch

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 19
Implementation Steps: Setting Up the Default Printer

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Implementation Steps: Setting Up the Default Printer
You have the option of publishing the price book to a printer. The default printer you define in

r a
the configuration is used if no printer name is specified when publishing the price book.

O ly
To define the default printer, add the printer for your site to the Oracle XML Publisher
Delivery Manager configuration and specify it as the default entry.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 20
Implementation Steps: Setting up Oracle XML Publisher

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Implementation Steps: Setting up Oracle XML Publisher
Using Oracle XML Publisher, you can publish your price books in a variety of formats such as

r a
PDF, RTF, and EXCEL (XLS). The Delivery Server Component of the Oracle XML Publisher
(XDO) product (available with XML Publisher 5.0 and newer versions) is required to send the
O ly
price book to a printer or as an e-mail attachment.

l & On
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides seeded XML templates you can use to generate your price
books. Oracle XML Publisher is required to create and maintain XML Publisher templates that

a e
define the layout for the published price book. You may need to create multiple templates
n
r s
depending on the desired publishing option (e-mail or print) and the output format [EXCEL

e
(XLS), PDF, RTF]; for example, you may want a separate template for print versions and
another for e-mail.
t U
I n
Note: To send the price book as an e-mail attachment, you also need to configure the e-mail

c l e
server in XML Publisher.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 21
Implementation Steps: Setting up XML Gateway Message Map

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Implementation Steps: Setting up the XML Gateway Message Maps
Price book requires XML gateway message maps for generating and transmitting price book

r a
information to and from external customers. Use these message maps to:

O ly
• Receive input criteria from the Trading Partner (external customer) and generate the price
book via an OAG XML transaction: use GET_CATALOG_002 message map.

l & On
• Transmit the price book to the Trading Partner as an OAG XML Transaction: use
SYNC_CATALOG_003 message map.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 22
GET_CATALOG_002 XML Message

m y
d e
ca
e A
GET_CATALOG_002 XML Message

c l
The GET_CATALOG_002 XML document conforms to the following Open Applications

r a
Group (OAG) document type definition (DTDs): 129_get_catalog_002.dtd and the
oagis_extensions.dtd. These and other relevant DTDs (oagis_domains.dtd,
O ly
oagis_entity_extensions.dtd, oagis_fields.dtd, oagis_resources.dtd, oagis_segments.dtd) are

& On
loaded to the XML Gateway, and are located at $qp/xml/oag.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 23
SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML message

m y
d e
ca
e A
SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML message

c l
The seller uses SYNC_CATALOG_003 to publish a new price book. If the price book

r a
information changes, the seller can re-generate the price book so the buyer can replace the
price book with the more recent price book. An XML Gateway Message Map,
O ly
QP_CATSO_OAG72_OUT.xgm, is provided to generate the SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML

l & On
document. It has the following inputs:
• Price Book Header: Generated using QP_PRICE_BOOK_HEADERS_V

n a e
• Price Book Lines: Generated using QP_PRICE_BOOK_LINES_V (price book summary
lines)

t e r U s
• Price Book Line Details: Generated using QP_PRICE_BOOK_LINE_DETAILS_V (price

I n
list lines and modifier lines)
• Pricing Attributes of the Price List Lines: Generated using

l e
QP_PRICE_BOOK_ATTRIBUTES_V (price list lines)

c
• Price Break Lines of Price Break Header Modifiers and Price List Lines: Generated using

r a QP_PRICE_BOOK_BREAK_LINES_V

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 24
Price Book Public APIs

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 25
Create Price Book API

m y
d e
ca
e A
Create Price Book API

c l
Based on the input criteria, a concurrent request is submitted by the system (a concurrent

r a
request is also submitted when you are creating price books either through the price book
feature or Get_Catalog). The Request ID, a return status, and any errors that are encountered
O ly
during input parameter validation or when you are submitting a concurrent request will be
returned as output parameters.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 26
Get Price Book API

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 27
Creating a Price Book

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating a Price Book

c l
You can create price books to generate prices for a single item, an item category, all items, or

r a
items within a specified price lists. The prices generated in the price book are based on the
pricing perspective. The value for the operating unit defaults from the Multi-Org Access
Control (MOAC) setup.
O ly
l & On
The pricing perspective mimics the calling application so as to simulate prices coming from an
order, service contract, or purchase order. An internal user can edit the value but an external

a e
cannot view or edit it. These prices are currency specific, but the price book does handle multi-
n
t e r U s
currency (price list) conversions supported in price lists.
Note: All item/UOM combinations will be priced.

I n
You can set the pricing effective date for a past date, current date, or future date. Information
in the Price Calculation Criteria will be input parameters to generate the price book. Currency,

l e
Quantity, and Customer are mandatory fields. The quantity will always default to 1, but can be

c
updated. You can specify a price list, pricing agreement, or sales agreement as a starting point

r a
for the price book. The pricing engine will always perform a search across all the valid pricing
setups to derive the price.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 28
Creating a Price Book: Defining General Price Book Criteria

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Creating a Price Book: Defining General Price Book Criteria
Select details about the price book including the name and pricing perspective. The value you

r a
select in the Product Criteria field determines what items will appear in the price book. You
can select a single item, item category, all items, or price list. If price list is selected, all items
O ly
and UOM combinations within the price list will get priced, but the final list price may be

Note:
l & On
derived from a different price list.

n a e
• The Operating Unit value defaults from the the Multi-Org Access Control (MOAC) setup.

it.
t e r U s
• An internal user can edit the pricing perspective value but an external cannot view or edit

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 29
Creating a Price Book: Defining Price Calculation Criteria

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Creating a Price Book: Defining Price Calculation Criteria
The price calculation criteria includes values such as currency, date, customer, and quantity,

r a
that the pricing engine requires to generate price books. Optionally, you can enter a value in
the Pricing Basis field to give the pricing engine a starting point from which to look for prices.
O ly
• Currency: Prices are currency specific, but handles multi-currency (price lists) conversions
supported in price lists.

l & On
• Pricing effective dates: Past date, current date, or future dates.

n a e
• Pricing Basis: Agreement, sales agreement, or price list.

t e r U s
• Additional criteria: Define further qualities for price book such as qualifiers, pricing
attributes. These attributes may determine if a specific price or modifier will be applied. If

I n
you do any formula-based pricing using pricing attributes, enter those attributes here.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 30
Creating a Price Book: Selecting Price Book Publishing Options

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Creating a Price Book: Selecting Price Book Publishing Options
You can select from many publishing options for the price book:

r a
• Send Email: Specifies the e-mail addresses to which the price book will be sent.

O ly
You can enter multiple e-mail addresses, separated by commas.

l & On
• Send to Printer: Enter the name of the printer where the price book is to be printed. If no
printer is specified, the default printer defined in the XDO configuration file is used.

a e
• Send XML Message: Select this option to send the price book as a

n
r
SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML message to the customer specified in the Customer Site

t e U s
field. The Sync Catalog 003 message corresponds to the price book in the XML format. If
you select this option, then the Customer Site field is displayed and a value must be

I n
selected from the list of values. Note: The Send XML Message publishing option is not
available when the Pricing Perspective is Purchasing.

l e
• View Document: Select a Template and Document Type to view the document online.
c
r a
Note: The e-mail and printer server must be configured properly to use the e-mail and printer
publishing options. For more details on publishing options, please refer to the XML Publishing

O documentation.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 31
Price Book Publishing Templates

m y
d e
ca
e A
Price Book Publishing Templates

c l
In XML Publisher, you can create and maintain price book templates. You can select the

r a
following seeded templates to enable output formats of PDF, RTF, and Excel:

O ly
• Price Book Details report: Shows all the items in their respective categories with list price,
net price, and all modifiers.

l & On
• Price Book Errors report: Provides information on any pricing error that occurred during
the generation of the price book.

n a e
• Price Book Summary report: Displays an item’s list and net price. To generate the View

t e r U s
Document, a template and template type must be selected.
• You may need to create multiple templates depending on the desired publishing option (e-

I n
mail or print) and the desired output format (Excel, HTML, PDF, RTF).

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 32
Price Book Publishing: Document Types

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 33
Generating and Publishing Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
Generating and Publishing Price Books

c l
In the background, two concurrent requests are completed to generate or republish a price

r a
book. The first concurrent request will create the price book header and items. The second
concurrent request calls the pricing engine to get the list price, net price, and associated
modifiers.
O ly
& On
Note: The completed price book can be viewed only after this concurrent request is completed.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 34
Practice - Creating a Price Book
Overview
In this practice, you want to publish lists of products and their related prices on the price list XX-
Price List 1 for your customer XX-Big City Electronics. The price book will show both the list
and the net prices.

In a subsequent practice, you will create a delta price book to review the prices that result from a
promotional modifier being priced and see how the changes display in the delta price book.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations responsibility

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Creating the Price Book

1. Navigate to the Create Price Book page.


m y
2. Click Create Price Book.
d e
3. Complete your entries in the Create Price Book page:
ca
− Price Book Name = XX-Price Book

e A
− Operating Unit = Vision Operations. Note: Each price book is operating unit

c l
specific and the value defaults based on the multi-org access control (MOAC)
setup.

r a
− Pricing Perspective = Order Management

O ly
− Product Criteria = Price List
− Price List Name = QP-Price List 1

l & On
a e
In the Price Calculation Criteria region:
− Currency = US dollar

r n s
− Pricing Effective Date = Current Date

t
− Quantity = 1

n e U
I
Note: Enter the assumed quantity per item when prices are published in the price

e
c l
book (default is 1). The quantity per item is applied regardless of the Product
Criteria selected such as All Items, Item, Item Category, or Price List. For example,

r a if All Items is selected and the Quantity is 1, then the price is based on 1 of each
item.

O − Customer = QP-Big City Electronics

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 35
In the Publishing Options region:
− Template = Price Book Details
− Document Type = EXCEL
− Publish = Immediate

4. Click Apply to create the price book. This generates a concurrent request.

5. Search for the price book to view the concurrent request status.

6. Click the Refresh Data button to update the search results table.

7. Click Name to view the price book. Note: Ensure that the concurrent process has completed.

8. Price book information displays in three tabs in the online view. The price book displays
items by item category. Click the Expand All link to view each item and its price.

Note: You can search for a specific product within the price book by entering a value in the
Product field.

9. Click the View Document link to open the EXCEL price book document that was generated.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 36
Solution - Creating a Price Book
Creating the Price Book

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User

1. Navigate to the Create Price Book page.

• (N) Home > (T) Reports

2. (B) Create Price Book.

3. In the Create Price Book page:


− Price Book Name = XX-Price Book
− Operating Unit = Vision Operations
− Pricing Perspective = Order Management
− Product Criteria = Price List
− Price List Name = QP-Price List 1

Price Calculation Criteria region:


− Currency = US dollar
− Pricing Effective Date = Current Date
− Quantity = 1
m y
− Customer = QP-Big City Electronics
d e
Publishing Options region:
− Template = Price Book Details ca
− Document Type = EXCEL

e A
− Publish = Immediate

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 37
m y
d e
ca
4. (B) Apply.

e A
Viewing the Price Book

c l
5. Click (T) Reports.

r a
6.
O ly
Search for the price book to view the concurrent request status:
− Type = Price Book Name = QP-Price Book

7.
l & On
(B) Go to display search results.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 38
8. (B) Refresh Data.

9. (B) Name = QP-Price Book.

10. Price book information displays in three tabs in the online view. The price book displays
items by item category. Click Expand All to view each item and its list and net price.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 39
m y
d e
ca
11. Click the View Document link to open the EXCEL price book document that was generated.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 40
m y
d e
12. Close your work.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 41
Viewing Price Book Details Online

m y
d e
ca
e A
Viewing Price Book Details Online

c l
The price book determines all the items to be priced and then displays each item in their

r a
respective item category. If an item belongs in more than one category, then the price book will
display multiple categories. For an item, you will see the price list used to derive the list price.
O ly
If there are any line level discounts, surcharges, price breaks, or freight and special charge

l & On
modifier, then these will be displayed below the list price line. If pricing buckets have been
defined for any modifiers, the modifiers will be displayed in the order of the pricing buckets,

a e
with the null bucket modifiers displayed last. Although freight and special charges do not

n
r
affect the unit selling price in Advanced Pricing, they will affect the Net Price in the Price
Book.

t e U s
From the online view, you can view any price break details or any pricing attributes used in the

I n
price calculation. Pricing errors (such as missing pricing attribute for formula processing or

c l e
duplicate prices) are also displayed on a separate page.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 42
Viewing Price Book Details Online

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 43
Creating a Delta Price Book

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating a Delta Price Book

c l
A delta price book displays only items and updated prices based on a new pricing effective

r a
date. All the input criteria such as customer, quantity, pricing, or qualifier attributes remain the
same as the full price book. Prices for new or deleted items will be reflected in the delta price
book.
O ly
l & On
All the publishing options offered in the full price book are supported in the delta price book.
Although you can regenerate delta price books by changing the New Pricing Effective Date,

a e
there can only be one delta price book for a full price book. The delta price book will have the
n
t e r U s
same Price Book name as the full and the type will be Delta.
Note: If a full price book is deleted, its corresponding delta price book will also be deleted.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 44
Practice - Creating a Delta Price Book
Overview
In this practice, you want to run a special discount sale on all your price list items. However, you
first want to generate a delta price book (based on your existing price book) to review the
resulting price changes. (For a delta price book, you can only enter a new pricing effective date.)
The remaining price calculation criteria will be identical to your full price book.

You want to ensure the modifier discount will be in effect for when you generate the price book,
so you will enter tomorrow’s date for both the pricing effective date for the delta price book and
the modifier date.

Note: Use the modifier “XX-Discount 1” that you created in a prior practice.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

• Oracle Pricing User, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices have been completed.

m y

e
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.
d
Tasks
ca
Activating the Discount Modifier
e A
c l
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

r a
O ly
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

2.
& On
Query your modifier XX-Discount 1. This modifier applies a 5% line-level discount.

l
3.
a e
Complete the following entries:

n
− Active (header level) = Selected

t e r U s
− Start Date = Tomorrow’s Date

4.
I
Save your work.
n
l e
Creating the Delta Price Book

c
a
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User
r
O5. Navigate to the Create Price Book page.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 45
6. Search for the price book you created in the previous practice named QP-Price Book.

7. Click Go.

8. Click Create Delta.

9. Enter tomorrow’s date in the New Pricing Effective Date field.

10. Click Apply to create the delta price book. (Click No when asked if you want to create
another price book.)

11. Click the delta price book Name to view the generated delta price book. Note: The Type
column identifies the price book as either a Full or Delta price book.

12. Price book information displays in three tabs in the online view. The price book displays
items by item category.

13. Click the Expand All link to view each item and its price.

Note: You can search for a specific product within the price book by entering a value in the
Product field.

14. Click the View Document link to open the EXCEL price book document that was generated.
Items will appear on a delta price book if there are price changes, new items, or deleted

m
items. Since the modifier was applied to each line item, all items will appear in the delta
y
display.
d e
price book. If the modifier applied to only a few items, only those changed items would

ca
Note: After you complete this practice, deselect the Active check box (modifier header) for
your modifier “XX-Discount 1.”

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 46
Solution - Creating a Delta Price Book
Activating the Discount Modifier

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

• (N) Modifiers > Modifier Setup

2. Query your modifier XX-Discount 1. This modifier applies a 5% line-level discount.

3. Complete the following entries:


− Active (header level) = Selected
− Start Date = Tomorrow’s Date

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
4. (B) Save.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 47
Creating the Delta Price Book

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing User

5. Navigate to the Create Price Book page.

• (N) Home > (T) Reports

6. Search for the price book QP-Price Book that you created in the previous practice:
− Type = Price Book Name = QP-Price Book

7. (B) Go.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
8. (I) Create Delta.
r a
9.
O ly
In Price Calculation Criteria region:
− New Pricing Effective Date = Tomorrow’s date

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 48
m y
d e
ca
10. (B) Apply. Click No when asked if you want to create another price book.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 49
11. Click the delta price book Name to view the delta price book. Note: The Type column
identifies the price book as either a Full or Delta price book.

Price book information displays in three tabs in the online view. The price book displays
items by item category.

12. Click the Expand All link to view each item and its price.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
Note: You can search for a specific product within the price book by entering a value in the
Product field.
l & On
n a e
13. Click the View Document link to open the generated EXCEL spreadsheet.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 50
You can view effects of the modifier being applied by reviewing the discount values in the
Modifier Value field, and viewing the resulting List and Net Prices.

m y
d e
ca
e A
your modifier “XX-Discount 1.”
c l
Note: After you complete this practice, deselect the Active check box (modifier header) for

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 51
Maintaining Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
Maintaining Price Books
Responsibility: Oracle Pricing User
c l
(N) Home > Reports
r a
O ly
Maintenance capabilities are offered on the Price Book Main page under the Reports tab.
You can search for Price Books using the Simple Search. To add additional search criteria,

l & On
click the Show More Options link. You can sort your search results by Price Book Name,

n a e
Customer, or Price Effective Date of the price book. You can create new full price books or
select a full price book and create its associated delta price book.

t e r U s
You can also delete one or more price books. Note that if a full price book is deleted, its
corresponding delta price book will also be deleted.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 52
Republishing Price Books

m y
d e
ca
e A
Republishing Price Books

c l
If you decide to republish a price book, the price book is not regenerated meaning the data in

r a
the price book will remain the same. All the publishing options (e-mail, print, XML Message,
View Document) are available and this process will override existing documents or templates.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 53
Viewing Errors

m y
d e
ca
e A
Viewing Errors

c l
Errors in your price book will be indicated in the Search Results and within your price book.

r a
There is also a seeded template to view pricing errors.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 54
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 55
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Price Books
Chapter 7 - Page 56
Attribute Management

y
Chapter 8

em
a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 2
Attribute Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 4
What Is Attribute Management?

m y
d e
ca
e A
What Is Attribute Management?

c l
Pricing objects in Advanced Pricing enable you to define pricing actions and pricing rules for a

r a
given business process. Through price lists, modifiers, and formulas, these pricing actions
provide the ability to define prices, price adjustments, and other benefits. You can define
O ly
pricing rules such as qualifiers and pricing attributes to drive your pricing actions. The

l & On
attributes can be used as elements to express your product or customer hierarchy.
A product hierarchy element is a level at which pricing characteristics can be defined.

a e
Examples of product hierarchy are item number, category, or brand. Customer hierarchy is an
n
t e r U s
example of a qualifier hierarchy, such as customer group.
Through attribute management, the pricing engine receives all the values of the attributes

I n
defined in the qualifier and pricing attributes in order to determine which price lists and
modifiers the transaction is qualified for.

l e
The data sources for the qualifiers and pricing attributes can be within Oracle Applications or

c
from outside Oracle Applications. You can use attribute mapping to easily extend pricing to

r a
derive data from a wide variety of non-standard sources to drive pricing actions. In the attribute
management windows, you can create new attributes, update existing attribute properties, or

O disable attribute mapping rules at various levels such as the order or line level.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 5
Attribute Management Features

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 6
Process Flow for Creating Contexts and Attributes

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 7
Common Terms

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 8
Common Terms

m y
d e
ca
e A
Common Terms

c l
A Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE) consists of a group of applications sharing the same setup

r a
data. A Pricing Transaction Entity consists of multiple source systems and request types.

O ly
Note: Source systems can be shared between PTEs.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 9
What Is a Context?

m y
d e
ca
e A
What Is a Context?

c l
You can use qualifier contexts and attributes to determine eligibility for a modifier (who is

r a
eligible to receive the modifier). Qualifiers can be attached to price lists (only in Advanced
Pricing) and modifiers.
O ly
Product contexts and its attributes define the product hierarchy and are related to product

Number and Item Category.


l & On
information. For example, the product context Item may consist of attributes such as Item

n a e
Pricing contexts are associated with pricing attributes. They further define eligibility for a price

modifiers.
t e r U s
list line or modifier, and can be used for a price list line, as a formula component, or in

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 10
Understanding Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 11
Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
Contexts
Oracle Pricing Manager Responsibility
c l
r a
(N) Pricing > Setup > Attribute Management > Context and Attributes > Context Setup –
Advanced Pricing
O ly
Contexts are a group of related pricing elements that can have attributes linked to them. Once

l & On
the context is defined, you can create its attributes. Attributes determine the specific values in
which you define pricing rules. For example, customer hierarchy can include pricing

a e
characteristics such as customer name = Customer ABC.
n
t e r U s
Context/attribute combinations are available for use in the Pricing Setup windows once they
are created and linked to a specific Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE).
Code
I n
Short name for a context. Once defined and saved , user can not modify it later.
Name
c l e
r a
Name of a context. It will be displayed in the context LOVs available in
Qualifier/Modifier/formula screens. User can modify it if needed.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 12
Description
Description of a context. User can modify it if needed.
Seeded
This check box is selected automatically if the context is seeded ( oracle apps user is
datamerge). It remains selected even if you manually overwrite the seeded context.
Enabled
Select the Enabled check box to make this context available in qualifier/modifier/price
list/formula setups. When a context is disabled, it will not display in the context LOV on
qualifier/modifier/formula/price list windows and hence, all the attributes defined for this
context will also be unavailable for setup.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 13
Qualifier Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
Qualifier Contexts

c l
Predefined (seeded) qualifier contexts and associated qualifier attributes that use Oracle

r a
Application database tables as the data source wherever applicable are provided.

O ly
Advanced Pricing lets you define qualifiers to determine eligibility rules governing who can
receive a particular price, discount, promotion, or benefit. Qualifiers and qualifier groups can

l & On
then be linked to Oracle price lists and
modifiers. The following are common qualifier terms:

n a e
• Qualifier Contexts: Consist of flattened hierarchies where similar qualifying attributes can

t e r U s
be grouped into logical categories.
• Qualifiers: Specific attributes that assist Oracle Advanced Pricing with limiting the who

I n
for benefit or price eligibility.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 14
Qualifier Context Examples

m y
d e
ca
e A
Qualifier Context Examples

c l
Qualifiers determine eligibility rules governing who can receive a particular price, discount,
promotion, or benefit.
r a
O ly
Qualifier Contexts and its attributes can be used to create qualifiers that determine eligibility
for a modifier (who is eligible to receive a particular price, discount, promotion, or benefit).

& On
Qualifiers can be attached to price lists (only in Advanced Pricing) and modifiers.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 15
Product Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
Product Contexts

c l
Product Contexts and its attributes define the product hierarchy and are related to product

r a
information. For example, the product context Item may consist of attributes such as Item
Number and Item Category.
Warning O ly
existing Product Context Item.
l & On
You cannot add new contexts of Product Context type. However, you can add attributes to the

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 16
Attributes for Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attributes for Contexts

c l
Pricing objects in Advanced Pricing enable users to define pricing actions and pricing rules for

r a
a given business process. The attributes can be used as elements to express your product or
customer hierarchy.
O ly
A product hierarchy element is a level at which pricing characteristics can be defined.

l & On
Examples of product hierarchy are item number, category, or brand. Customer hierarchy is an
example of a qualifier hierarchy, such as customer group.

n a e
Through Attribute Management, the Pricing Engine receives all the values of the attributes

t e r U s
defined in the qualifier and pricing attributes in order to determine which price lists and
modifiers the transaction is qualified for.

I n
The data sources for the qualifiers and pricing attributes can be within Oracle Applications or
from outside Oracle Applications. Users can use the feature of Attribute Mapping to easily

l e
extend Pricing to tap into data from a wide variety of non-standard sources to drive their

c
pricing actions. In the attribute management windows, users can create new attributes, update

r a
existing attribute properties, or disable Attribute Mapping rules at various levels such as PTE-
Attribute link level or at Order at line level.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 17
How Can Attributes Control Pricing Actions?

m y
d e
ca
e A
How Can Attributes Control Pricing Actions?

c l
Attaching qualifiers and pricing attributes to price lists and modifiers allows you to control

r a
your pricing actions (to get a list price or price adjustment). These attributes provide
information to the pricing engine during a pricing engine call. The extensibility feature that
O ly
allows these attributes to be provided to the pricing engine during a pricing engine call is
attribute management.

l & On
Party Hierarchy Enabled box: Hierarchies consist of tiered relationships where one party is

a e
ranked above another, for example, a corporate hierarchy where different companies are
n
r s
related as parent, subsidiary, headquarters, division and so on. Select this check box if the

e
qualifier attribute references Oracle TCA (Trading Community Architecture) parties and if
t U
price lists or modifiers with this qualifier attribute need to be made available to the party

I n
hierarchy. This enables you to cascade a discount or price list to subsidiaries and branches by

l e
setting up a qualifier at the top level rather than creating multiple qualifiers, one for each
subsidiary or division.
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 18
Attributes in Advanced Pricing

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attributes in Advanced Pricing

c l
When the pricing engine gets a pricing request, attribute management retrieves all values for

r a
the qualifier and pricing attributes associated with the transaction. The pricing engine evaluates
these values to determine which price lists and modifiers are eligible for the transaction. The
O ly
data sources for the qualifiers and pricing attributes can be within Oracle Applications or from
outside Oracle Applications.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 19
Creating Attributes for Contexts

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating Attributes for Contexts

c l
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager Responsibility > Setup > Attribute Management > Context and
Attributes.
r a
O ly
Once the context is defined, you can create its attributes. Attributes determine the specific
values in which you define pricing rules. For example, customer hierarchy can include pricing

l & On
characteristics such as customer name = Customer ABC.
Attributes can further express product or customer hierarchies for a given context. To create

n a e
new attributes, use the Attribute Management setup windows.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 20
Attribute Selection: Pricing Engine Processing

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attribute Selection: Pricing Engine Processing

c l
In Attribute Management, you can use external data to source attribute values. Users can enter

r a
values for attributes during runtime or create mapping rules to derive the data. In the attribute
management user interface, you can view and change both seeded and user-created attributes.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 21
Pricing Attributes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Attributes

c l
Pricing attributes control what is being priced or modified on a price list or modifier list.

r a
Creating Context and Attributes to be used for Pricing Setup Windows

O ly
Contexts are a group of related pricing elements that can have attributes linked to them. Once
the context is defined, you can create its attributes. Attributes determine the specific values in

l & On
which you define pricing rules. For example, customer hierarchy can include pricing
characteristics such as customer name = Customer ABC.
Creating Contexts
n a e
t e r U s
In Attribute Management, you can set up three types of contexts:
• Qualifier Contexts and its attributes can be used to create qualifiers that determine

I n
eligibility for a modifier (who is eligible to receive the modifier). Qualifiers can be
attached to price lists (only in Advanced Pricing) and modifiers.

l e
• Product Contexts and its attributes define the product hierarchy and are related to product
c
r a information. For example, the product context Item may consist of attributes such as Item
Number and Item Category. You cannot add new contexts of Product Context type.

O However, you can add attributes to the existing Product Context Item.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 22
• Pricing Contexts are associated with pricing attributes. They further define eligibility for a
price list line or modifier. They can be used for a price list line, as a formula component,
or in Modifiers.
For example, a product context such as Item can be further categorized by attributes such as
Item Name and Item Number while a qualifier context such as Customer can consist of
attributes such Customer Name and Customer ID.
Creating Attributes
The pricing engine evaluates attributes during engine run time to determine which price lists
and modifiers are eligible for the transaction. Attribute values can be derived at the order level,
line level, or for both order and line levels.
You must create all new attributes using the Attribute Management setup windows. Oracle
Pricing Manager Responsibility > Setup > Attribute Management > Context and Attributes.
With the Attribute Management feature, you can define attributes for a given context,
determine how they are sourced, decide which attributes can be selected from a list in the
Pricing Setup windows, and determine which ones are used in promotional limits.
Pricing Attributes
The following are examples of pricing attributes used to specify conditions of a product or
service that affects the price:
• Product ID = HMO Plan 15; Pricing Attribute = State = Connecticut; List Price = $200.00
per month.
• Product = HMO Plan 15; Pricing Attribute = State = New York; List Price = $250.00 per
month.
m y
d e
• Product ID = Motor Oil; Pricing Attribute = Grade = Regular; List Price = $3.50 per Quart

quart
ca
• Product ID = Motor Oil; Pricing Attribute = Grade = Premium; List Price = $4.25 per

11:00pm); list price =.08 per minute


e A
• Product ID = Usage Charge; Pricing Attribute = Time of Day = Evening (7:00pm to

c l
• Product ID = Usage Charge; Pricing Attribute = Time of Day = Late night (6:00am to
5:30am) list price =.05 per minute
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 23
Pricing Attributes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Attributes (continued)
Order Management Super User Responsibility
c l
r a
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup (T) List Lines (B) Pricing Attributes

O ly
1. Choose Pricing Attributes in the List Lines tab to display the Pricing Attributes window.
2. Enter a pricing context.
3. Enter a pricing attribute.
l & On
a e
4. Select = or BETWEEN for Operator.

n
5. Enter Value From.

t e r s
6. If the Operator is BETWEEN, enter Value To.
U
line.
I n
Note: The pricing attributes are joined as AND conditions since they apply to one price list

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 24
Restoring Context and Attribute Defaults

m y
d e
ca
e A
Restoring Context and Attribute Defaults

c l
The Restore Defaults button (on Context Setup window) replaces values with their original
seeded values.
r a
Sourcing Rules
O ly
For all seeded sourcing rules, Restore Defaults button will restore back the seeded Source type

l & On
and the seeded Value string as User source type and User value string respectively. If the
seeded Source type and the seeded Value string are same as user Source type and user Value

n a e
string, the Restore Defaults button will be grayed out.

• Context Setup
t e r U s
You can restore the default seeded settings in the following windows:

• Link Attributes
I n
Contexts

c l e
For contexts, the Restore Default button restores the context to the original seeded values. So

r a
even if a seeded context has been changed, the values are restored to their original condition.
The Name and Description fields display the seeded values rather than the user-entered values.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 25
For seeded contexts, the Name and Description fields display their seeded values. However if
these seeded values are changed, these fields show the user-entered values and the seeded
values will be preserved in seeded name, seeded description fields respectively. These seeded
fields will always be hidden.
Attributes
For attributes, the Restore Default button restores the original seeded values. So if a seeded
attribute has been changed, the values can be restored to their original condition. Precedence,
name, valueset, datatype window fields display the seeded values in place of user entered
values.
For seeded attributes, the precedence, name, valueset, and datatype fields display their seeded
values. However, if you change the seeded values, these fields display the user-entered values
and the seeded values will be preserved in separate fields named as seeded precedence, seeded
name, seeded valueset, seeded datatype. These seeded fields will always be hidden.
Link Attributes
For seeded attributes, the Attribute Mapping Method column displays the seeded value of the
attribute. However, if you change the attribute mapping method, this field displays the user-
entered value; the seeded value will be preserved in a separate field named as seeded Attribute
Mapping Method. This seeded Attribute Mapping Method field will always be hidden.
The Restore Default button restores the original seeded attribute mapping method for an
attribute. If you overwrite a seeded attribute and later want to restore the original seeded
values, click the Restore Default button to restore the seeded values.

m y
This button will be grayed out for non-seeded attributes. However, the button remains 'grayed

seeded Attribute Mapping method.


d e
out' for seeded attributes, if the user-entered Attribute Mapping method is the same as the

Attribute Mapping
ca
For all seeded Attribute Mapping rules, the Restore Defaults button restores the seeded Source
A
type and the seeded Value string as User source type and User value string respectively. If the

e
c l
seeded Source type and the seeded Value string are same as user Source type and user Value
string, the Restore Defaults button will be grayed out.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 26
Pricing Attributes and Flexfields

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Attributes and Flexfields

c l
A context of type Pricing Attribute will also be created as Flexfield Pricing Contexts in the

r a
Flexfield, once it is created using the Contexts and Attributes window. All the above
definitions of contexts and attributes are stored in QP tables. However, the same data will be
O ly
stored in flexfield tables as well, if the context type is Pricing

l & On
Attribute. This occurs because Order Management (OM) uses flexfield structure for pricing
attributes. Hence for pricing attributes to display on OM's windows, these definitions need to

a e
be in the flexfield tables as well.
n
t e r U s
However, Pricing Attribute setup must always be done in the Context and Attributes setup
menu. If user does a pricing attribute setup in flexfield tables, the setup data will not be

I n
available in the QP tables as data is not copied from flexfield tables to QP tables. So even
though the pricing attribute displays in OM windows, it will never be selected by the engine.

l e
A context and attributes of type Pricing Attribute will get updated and deleted in the flexfield,

c
if updated and deleted in the Context and Attributes window if it meets the deletion criteria.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 27
Stages in Attribute Creation

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 28
Linking Attributes to a Pricing Transaction Entity

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Linking Attributes to a Pricing Transaction Entity
Once you have set the context and attributes, you can link an attribute grouping to a specific

r a
Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE). From the PTE-Attribute Linking window, you are linking
specific attributes to a PTE. Attributes can be defined for different levels such as line, order, or
both.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 29
Linking Attributes to a Pricing Transaction Entity

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Linking Attributes to a Pricing Transaction Entity (continued)
Attributes can be linked to one or more Pricing Transaction Entities. The Pricing Transaction

r
Entity has the following characteristics:
a
O ly
• Reduces the data the search engine evaluates--uses only the setup data generated by the
source systems defined for that PTE.

attributes available to them.


l & On
• All applications belonging to the same pricing transaction entity have the same set of

n a e
The following check boxes are used with the Advanced Pricing–Pricing Transaction Entity–
Attribute Linking window:

t e r U s
• Seeded check box (for seeded contexts)

I n
• Enabled check box (to enable the context in a pricing setup), and

l e
• Assigned to PTE check box (shows which contexts and its attributes have been assigned to
a PTE.)
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 30
Selecting Attribute Options

m y
d e
ca
e A
Selecting Attribute Options

c l
From the PTE-Attribute Linking window (in the Link Attributes window), you can define
specific options for an attribute:
r a
Level
O ly
Attributes can be defined at the following levels: Line, Order, or Both. For example, an

& On
attribute agreement_id set at the Order level means that only the header level
l
not be attribute mapped.
n a e
agreement_id will be attribute mapped; however, the agreement_id on order lines will

t e r U s
The attribute level is also used to selectively display pricing attributes/qualifiers in the LOVs
while setting up modifiers/formulas/price list/qualifiers.
Use in Limits
I n
l e
If Use in Limits is selected, the attribute can be selected from the Attribute list of values in the
Limits setup windows (including the Other Attributes window).
c
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 31
Attribute Mapping Method
The attribute mapping method shows how the data for an attribute is derived. If you select the
mapping method of Attribute Mapping, then you should select the Attribute Mapping Enabled
box. Otherwise, the mapping rule will not work properly.
The Attribute Mapping Status check box will not be selected after you initially create the
mapping rule. However, after you run the build attribute mapping rules program, the check box
will be selected to indicate that an attribute mapping rule was generated.
Note: If the attribute is not assigned an attribute mapping method, it will not be available in
pricing setups.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 32
Attribute Levels

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attribute Levels
Price List setup window
c l
r a
1. The LOV for Qualifier Attributes in the Qualifiers tab displays qualifier attributes with

O ly
attribute levels of Line or Both. This occurs because an Order Line may qualify for a price
list based on a qualifier attribute of the Order Line or both the Order Header and Order
Line.

l & On
2. The LOV for pricing attributes displays pricing attributes with Attribute Level = Line.
Modifier List setup window
n a e
t e r U s
1. The LOV for Qualifier Attributes in the Line Qualifiers window displays qualifier
attributes with attribute levels: Order or Both if the Modifier Level Code is Order.

I n
2. The LOV for Qualifier Attributes in the Line Qualifiers window displays qualifier
attributes with attribute levels of Line or Both, if the Modifier Level Code is Line or Line

l
Group.
c e
r a
3. The LOV for Qualifier Attributes in the List Qualifiers window displays qualifier
attributes with attribute levels: Line, Order, or Both.

O 4. The LOV for Pricing Attributes will show pricing attributes with attribute level of Line.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 33
Qualifier Setup window
The LOV for qualifier attributes on the Qualifier Group setup window displays will show all
levels of Qualifier Attributes. However, a qualifier group can’t have one qualifier attribute with
the level ‘ORDER’ and another qualifier attribute with the level LINE with the same Qualifier
Grouping No. All the qualifiers within a Qualifier Grouping No must have the attributes with
the level either as ORDER or BOTH or as LINE or BOTH.
Formula Lines and Factors List
Since a formula can be applied either at order level or at line level, it is not possible at the
definition time to restrict the attributes appearing in the LOV’s, based on the attribute level.
Hence there will be no level based restrictions in the LOV.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 34
Attribute Levels

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 35
LOV Enabled: Pricing windows

m y
d e
ca
e A
LOV Enabled: Pricing windows

c l
This slide describes what attributes are shown in each of the pricing component setup LOV’s

r a
based on the Attribute Level assigned to the attribute. All attributes display in the Attributes
Setup window if Advanced Pricing is installed.
O ly
The following conditions apply when defining qualifiers or pricing attributes in price lists,
modifiers, or other pricing entities:

l & On
• Only those attributes with the LOV Enabled check box selected display in the LOV’s on
these setup windows.
n a e
t e r U s
• All attributes that are set up are available to Advanced Pricing users, subject to meeting
the other conditions (as described in (a) and (c)).

I n
• Ensure that the Attribute Level is appropriate.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 36
Disabling an Attribute from a PTE

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 37
Attribute Mapping Methods

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attribute Mapping Methods

c l
Attributes mapping is required before any pricing element can be used by the pricing engine.

r a
The pricing engine provides flexibility so that you define attribute mapping for a specific
transaction area. For example, a Customer Region can be derived from a
O ly
OE_ORDER_PUB.G_ HDR.sold_to_org_id for Order Management; however, it can

Order Capture.
l & On
also be derived from ASO_PRICING_INT.G_HEADER_REC.cust_account_id for

a e
After linking the context/attribute combination, you must select one of the following attribute
n
t e r U s
mapping methods to determine how the attribute is mapped:
• Attribute Mapping: If this is selected, further attribute mapping setup is required.

I n
• Custom Sourced: User provides a code.
• Runtime Sourced: Sourced in the pricing engine by a Custom API to source an

l e
accumulation attribute at runtime. During accumulated range break calculations, the

c
pricing engine calls the Runtime Sourcing API to acquire an accumulation value for the

r a accumulation attribute.

O • User Entered: Attribute value is entered by user, therefore further attribute mapping setup
is not required

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 38
If you select User Entered or Custom Sourcing as the Attribute Mapping Method, you have
finished assigning the attribute. You can now use it in a pricing setup.
Note: You will not have to run the Build Attribute Mapping rules program for user-entered or
custom sourced attributes.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 39
When Attribute Mapping Method is Selected

m y
d e
ca
e A
When Attribute Mapping Method is Selected

c l
If Attribute Mapping is selected as the Attribute Mapping Method, then click the Attribute

r a
Mapping button to define the Attribute Mapping rules for the selected attribute.

O ly
If Custom Sourced, Runtime Sourced, or User Entered is the Attribute Mapping Method, then
the process is complete-- you do not have to run the Build Attribute Mapping rules program for
these attributes.

l & On
Note: Line level region is grayed out if the level is Order.
Attribute Mapping Window
n a e
t e r U s
Request types region (Attribute Mapping window)
This region displays all the enabled Request types defined for the given PTE.

I n
You need to define attribute mapping for all the request types listed in this region.

l e
• Application Name: This column indicates the Application that created the mapping rule.

c
You can enter the Application before creating a mapping rule. In case an Application

r a name is not entered, the system defaults Oracle Pricing as the creator of the mapping rule.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 40
Header level region
• Enter data here if the Attribute Mapping level (defined in the Assign Attributes window)
of the attribute is Order or Both. This region will be grayed out if the level is Line.
• Global Object Name: This is a display only field. It will show the value defined in Request
type tab of the Pricing Transaction entity setup window.
• Seeded Source type: It will have value if the record is seeded. This field is protected
against update. If user wants to modify seeded mapping, user can enter data into
corresponding user field (user source type).
• User Source type: The possible values of source type are:
- Application Profile: Profile option: Select the profile option from where you want to
get the default value for this attribute. A LOV will provide a list of valid profile
options such as OE: Item Validation Organization.
- PL/SQL API: Attribute can be sourced directly from a global structure defined for
the given source system. For OM all the record structures are defined in the package
OE_ORDER_PUB. For example , if you want to use payment term id as the source
value for the new segment that you have defined , enter
G_LINE.payment_term_id in the function name. You have two record
structures available. OE_ORDER_PUB.G_LINE contains all the possible values of a
sales order line. OE_ORDER_PUB.G_HDR contains Fields from Order headers.
Structure of the Line_rec_type and header_rec_type can be obtained from the
Manufacturing Open Interface Manual. (For IStore/OC the equivalent global
structures are defined in the package ASO_PRICING_INT.
m y
- PL/SQL API Multi-Record: You can write a custom API (must be a function) that
returns multiple values. The output of your function can only be a table of
d e
c
VARCHAR2s: for example, to get the inventory categories for an item. Package:
a
Enter the PL/SQL package name.
Function: Enter the function name.
e A
c l
Constant Value: Constant: Enter a constant value that will
always be mapped to this attribute for the given condition.

r a
System Variable: Enter the system variable that will be

O ly
mapped to the attribute for the given condition such as
SYSDATE.

l & On
• Value String (user and seeded): It is a value of the source type. Seeded value string will
have seeded value. This field is protected against update. If user wants to modify seeded
a e
mapping, user can enter data into corresponding user field (user value string).
n
t e
mapping rule is seeded). r U s
• Seeded check box: This indicates if the mapping rule is seeded or not (if selected, the

Line level region


I n
You can enter data here if the level (defined in the Assign Attribute window) for the attribute is

l e
Line or Both. This region will be grayed out if the Segment level in the previous screen is

c
Order. The rest of the fields are the same as the Header level region.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 41
Setting Up a New Mapping Rule for a Qualifier or Pricing Attribute

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Setting Up a New Mapping Rule for a Qualifier or Pricing Attribute
1. Navigate to the Pricing Transaction Entity - Attribute Linking window.

r
2. Find the Pricing Transaction Entity.
a
O ly
3. In the Context Type Field Select the Context Type.
4. Click Link Attributes to open the Link Attributes window, and find the attribute to which

l
you want to define mapping rule.
& On
display-only fields.
n a e
5. Click Attribute Mapping to display the Attribute Mapping window: Context, Attribute are

6. Select request type.

t e r U s
n
7. Enter information in Header Level or Line Level region, or both the regions, depending

e I
on the Level of the attribute in the previous window. The Global structure/view name is
already displayed for that Request type chosen.

c l
8. Select the user source type.

r a
9. Enter a User Value String and save the record.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 42
Practice - Creating a Formula Using Pricing Attributes and
Factors
Overview
In this practice, you will expand your existing formula by using flexfields to create user-defined
product pricing attributes and pricing factors. For example, you sell cars and want to adjust the
price based on the car options chosen by the customer:

• When car options are “standard,” multiply the price by 1 (factor = 1)

• When car options are “business,” multiply the price by 1.5 (factor = 1.5)

• When car options are “deluxe,” multiply the price by 2 (factor = 2).

You also sell second hand cars and want to adjust the price further based on the age of the car.
For example if the car is:

• Between 0.0 and 1.0 years old, multiply the price by 1


Between 1.1 and 3.0 years old, multiply the price by 0.8

Older then 3.0 years, multiply the price by 0.6


m y
Then you will place an order using the car options formula and pricing attributes.
d e
There are 7 steps to create the formula and link it to the car items:
ca
Assumptions
e A
c l

a
Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility

r

O ly
Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility


& On
You can navigate standard Oracle Applications.
l

a e
You have basic knowledge of Oracle Advanced Pricing.
n

e r s
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
t U
n
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

e I
c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 43
Tasks
Step 1: Defining Value Sets for “Car Options” and “Car Age”

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager

1. Navigate to the Value Sets window.

2. Note: Save your work after defining each of the following value sets:

Define Value Sets for Car Age Car Options


Value Set Name XX-Car Age XX-Car Options
Description XX-Car Age XX-Car Options
List Type List of Values List of Values
Security Type No Security No Security
Format Type Number Char
Maximum Size 4 15
Precision 1 Leave Blank
Numbers Only Checked Unchecked

m y
e
Uppercase Only Unchecked Unchecked
Right-just-zero-fill-
numbers
Unchecked Unchecked

a d
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
0.0
30.0
Leave Blank
Leave Blank A c
Validation Type None
c l e Independent

3. Save your work.


r a
O ly
Note: Values are not required because the Validation Type for the Car Age Value Set is set

l & On
to None. By entering a minimum and maximum value in the Car Age Value Set, you
determine that the car age falls between 0 and 30 years.

n a e
t e r U s
Step 2. Defining Values for the Car Options Value Set

We do not have to define values for the Car Age Value Set because we set validation type to

I n
None meaning no validation is done for this value set. We can enter whatever values we want

4.
c e
between the minimum (0.0) and the maximum (30.0) that we specified

l
Navigate to the Segment Values window.

r
5. a Enter Value Set Name = XX-Car Options.
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 44
6. Click the Find button. The Segment Value appears.

7. Enter the following values for your XX-Car Options:

Value Translated Description Enabled Enabled From Enabled To


Value
(Defaults)
Business Business Business Selected Blank Blank
Deluxe Deluxe Deluxe Selected Blank Blank
Standard Standard Standard Selected Blank Blank

Step 3. Creating Context and Attributes

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations

8. Navigate to the Context Setup window.

9. In Context region:

Type
Pricing Context
Code
XX-CARS
Name
XX-Cars XX-Cars
Description

m y
d e
10. In Attribute region:

ca
Code Name Precedence

e
Application A
Column Mapped Value Set

c l Name
XX-
CAR
XX-Car
Age
800

r a Advanced
Pricing
PRICING_ATTRIBUTE1 XX-Car
Age

O ly
AGE
XX- XX-Car 810 Advanced PRICING_ATTRIBUTE2 XX-Car
CAR
OPTION
Option
l & On Pricing Options

n a e
11. Save your work

t e r U s
12. Close the window.

I n
c l e
Step 4: Complete Attribute Linking

13. Navigate to the Pricing Transaction Entity - Attribute Linking window.

r a
14. In the Attribute Linking and Mapping window:
O − Pricing Transaction Entity = Order Fulfillment

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 45
− Context Type = Pricing Context

15. Place cursor on the context of XX-CARS.

16. Click Link Attributes:

Code Level Attribute Mapping Method


XX-CAR AGE Line User Entered
XX-CAR OPTION Line User Entered

17. Save your work.

18. Close the window.

Step 5: Compiling the Pricing Contexts Descriptive Flexfield

19. Navigate to the FlexFields window.

20. Press F11 to enter the following query:


− Title = Pricing Contexts

21. Press Ctrl + F11 to run the query.


m y
22. Scroll down to find your XX-CARS context
d e
23. Click Compile.
ca
Step 6: Linking the Pricing Attributes to a Formula

e A
24. Navigate to the Formulas Setup window.
c l
r a
25. Click Find (flashlight). Query your XX-Formula.

26. Click Find.


O ly
27. Formula: Change to 1*2*3*4.
l & On
28. Click Save.
n a e
t e r U s
29. Go to the line level of the Formula window and enter a new line

I n
− Formula Type = Factor List
− Component = XX-Age (Note: You are entering this value.)

c l e
30. The following message box appears “A new factor list will be created. Continue?”

r a
31. Click OK.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 46
32. Enter Step = 3.

33. Click Factors:

Base Pricing Operator Value From Value To Factor Adjustment


Attribute
XX-Car Age BETWEEN 0.0 1.0 1
XX-Car Age BETWEEN 1.1 3.0 .8
XX-Car Age BETWEEN 3.1 30.0 .6

34. Click OK. Save your work.

35. Return to the formula setup window. At the line level, enter a new line
− Formula Type: Factor List
− Component: XX-Option

36. The following message box appears “A new factor list will be created. Continue?”

37. Click OK.

38. Step: 4
− Click Factors:
m y
d e
Base Pricing
Attribute
Operator Value From Value To
c a
Factor Adjustment

XX-Car Option = Standard

e
Blank A 1
XX-Car Option =
c l
Business Blank 1.5
XX-Car Option =

r a
Deluxe Blank 2.0

O ly
Note: The value in the Descriptive Flexfield Value Set and the value selected in the “Value

l & On
From” Column must match exactly. If you entered Standard in the values for the Car
Options Value Set, then you must enter Standard (and not e.g. STANDARD) in the “Value
From” column.

n a e
39. Click OK.

t e r U s
40. Save your work.
I n
c l e
Step 7: Linking the Formula to your Car Item in your Price List

a
41. Attach the formula to a price list line.

r
O42. Navigate to the Price List window

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 47
43. Find the XX-Price List 1.

44. Place your cursor on the line item XX-Car. Scroll to verify the amount in the Value field,
and select the formula in the Dynamic Formula field:

Product Value Line Type Application Value Dynamic


Attribute Method Formula
Item XX-Car Price List Line Unit Price 2300 XX-Formula
Number

45. Click Save.

Creating a Sales Order Using the Car Options Formula and Pricing Attributes

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations

46. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.

47. In the Order Information tab, Main sub-tab:


− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
− Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
− Price List = XX-Price-List 1

m y
48. Lines tab:
− Ordered Item = XX-Car
d e
− Quantity = 1
c a
Note: You may receive the following warning message: “Error in Formula processing...

e A
formula value null: 3,4.”
c l
Formula: XX-Formula. These are the Step Numbers which could have possibly made the

r a
49. Save your work and note the order number ___________.

O ly
50. Select Actions > Promotion/Pricing Attributes.

51. In Pricing Attributes tab:


l & On
− Pricing Context: XX-Cars
n a e
e r s
52. Click the descriptive flexfield icon (small field defined by the rectangular brackets at the
t U
top). Alternatively, press the Tab key to display the descriptive flexfield.

I n
53. You will be prompted to enter the customer selections

l e
− Car Age = 2.0

c
− Car Option = Business

r a
54. Click OK.
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 48
55. Click Apply.

The Pricing Engine calculation should result in a price of $4140.00, calculated as (1*2*3*4),
or (1.5 * 2300 * 0.8 * 1.5) = $4140, where:

• 1 = The numeric constant (1.5)

• 2 = The price of XX-Car from Price List 1 (2300)

• 3 = The age factor of two years (0.8); and

• 4 = The option factor of Business (1.5)

If the outcome is not $4140, Click on Actions > View Adjustments to see if any other
modifier was automatically applied.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 49
Solution - Creating a Formula Using Pricing Attributes and
Factors
Step 1: Defining Value Sets for “Car Options” and “Car Age”

Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)

1. Navigate to the Value Sets window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Validation > Sets

2. Note: Save your work after defining each of the following value sets:

Define Value Sets for Car Age Car Options


Value Set Name XX-Car Age XX-Car Options
Description XX-Car Age XX-Car Options
List Type List of Values List of Values
Security Type No Security No Security
Format Type Number Char

m y
Maximum Size
Precision
4
1
15
Leave Blank
d e
Numbers Only Selected Deselected
c a
Uppercase Only Deselected

e
Deselected
A
Right-just-zero-fill-numbers
Minimum Value
Deselected
0.0
c l Deselected
Leave Blank
Maximum Value 30.0
r a Leave Blank
Validation Type None
O ly Independent

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 50
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
3. (I) Save.
t e r U s
I n
Step 2. Defining Values for the Car Options Value Set

4.
l e
Navigate to the Segment Values window.

c
O
5. ra
• (N) Setup > Flexfields > Validation > Values

In Find Value Set window:

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 51
− Value Set Name = XX-Car Options

6. (B) Find. The Segment Values window appears.

7. (T) Values, Effective. Enter the following values for your XX-Car Options:

Value Translated Description Enabled Enabled From Enabled To


Value
(Defaults)
Business Business Business Selected Blank Blank
Deluxe Deluxe Deluxe Selected Blank Blank
Standard Standard Standard Selected Blank Blank

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
8. (I) Save.
t e r U s
I n
Step 3. Creating Context and Attributes

l e
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations
c
r
9.
a Navigate to the Context Setup window.

O • (N) Setup > Attribute Management > Context and Attributes

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 52
10. In Context region:

Type Code Name Description


Pricing Context XX-CARS XX-Cars XX-Cars

11. In Attributes region:

Code Name Prec Application Column Mapped Value Set


Name
XX-CAR XX-Car 800 Advanced PRICING_ATTRIBUTE1 XX-Car Age
AGE Age Pricing
XX-CAR XX-Car 810 Advanced PRICING_ATTRIBUTE2 XX-Car Options
OPTION Option Pricing

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
12. (I) Save your work.
I n
c l e
13. Close the window.

a
Step 4: Completing Attribute Linking

r
O14. Navigate to the Pricing Transaction Entity - Attribute Linking window.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 53
• (N) Pricing > Setup > Attribute Management > Attribute Linking and Mapping

15. In Attribute Linking and Mapping window:


− Pricing Transaction Entity = Order Fulfillment
− Context Type = Pricing Context

16. Select Context = XX-CARS.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
17. (B) Link Attributes:
r a
O ly
Code Level

l & On Attribute Mapping Method


XX-CAR AGE Line

n a e User Entered

r
XX-CAR OPTION Line User Entered

t e U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 54
18. (I) Save.

19. Close the window.

Step 5: Compiling the Pricing Contexts Descriptive Flexfield


m y
Responsibility = Order Pricing Manager, Vision Operations
d e
20. Navigate to the Flexfields window.
ca
• (N) Pricing > Setup > FlexFields

e A
21. Press F11 to enter the following query:
c l
− Title = Pricing Contexts

r a
22. Press Ctrl+F11 to run the query.
O ly
& On
23. Scroll down to find your XX-CARS context.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 55
m y
24. (B) Compile.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
l e
Step 6: Linking the Pricing Attributes to a Formula

c
a
25. Navigate to the Formulas Setup window.

r
O • (N) Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 56
26. (I) Find (flashlight). Query your XX-Formula.

27. (B) Find.

28. In Formula field: Change to 1*2*3*4.

m y
d e
ca
e A
29. (I) Save.

c l
− Formula Type = Factor List
r a
30. Go to the line level of the Formula window and enter a new line

O ly
− Component = XX-Age (Note: You are entering this value.)

l & On
31. The following message box appears “A new factor list will be created. Continue?”

32. (B) OK.


n a e
33. Step = 3
t e r U s
34. (B) Factors:
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 57
Base Base Pricing Operator Value From Value To Factor Adjustment
Pricing Attribute
Attribute
Context
QP-Cars XX-Car Age BETWEEN 0.0 1.0 1
QP-Cars XX-Car Age BETWEEN 1.1 3.0 .8
QP-Cars XX-Car Age BETWEEN 3.1 30.0 .6

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
35. (B) OK. (I) Save your work.
O ly
l & On
36. Return to the formula setup window. At the line level, enter a new line

− Component = XX-Option
n a e
− Formula Type = Factor List

t e r U s
37. The following message box appears “A new factor list will be created. Continue?”

38. (B) OK. I n


c
39. Step: 4l e
r a − (B) Factors:

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 58
Base Pricing Operator Value From Value To Factor Adjustment
Attribute
XX-Car Option = Standard Blank 1
XX-Car Option = Business Blank 1.5
XX-Car Option = Deluxe Blank 2.0

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
Note: The value in the Descriptive Flexfield Value Set and the value selected in the “Value

r a
From” Column must match exactly. If you entered Standard in the values for the Car

O ly
Options Value Set, then you must enter Standard (and not e.g. STANDARD) in the “Value
From” column.

40. (B) OK.


l & On
n a e
r
41. (I) Save.

t e U s
Step 7: Linking the Formula to your Car Item in your Price List

I n
42. Attach the formula to a price list line.

c l e
43. Navigate to the Price Lists window

r a• (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup

O44. (I) Query the XX-Price List 1.


Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 59
45. Place your cursor on the line item XX-Car. Scroll to verify the amount in the Value field,
and select the formula in the Dynamic Formula field:

Product Value Line Type Application Value Dynamic


Attribute Method Formula
Item XX-Car Price List Line Unit Price 2300 XX-Formula
Number

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
46. (B) Save.
O ly
& On
Creating a Sales Order Using the Car Options Formula and Pricing Attributes
l
a e
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
n
e r s
47. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
t U

I n
(N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

l e
48. In (T) Order Information, (T) Main:

c
− Customer = XX-Big City Electronics

r a − Required Header information defaults from your customer setup


− Price List = XX-Price-List 1
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 60
m y
49. (T) Lines:
− Ordered Item = XX-Car
d e
− Quantity = 1
ca
Note: You may receive the following warning message:

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
n
50. (I) Save your work and note the order number ___________.
I
c l e
51. (B) Actions > Promotion/Pricing Attributes.

a
52. (T) Pricing Attributes:

O r − Pricing Context = XX-Cars

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 61
53. (B) Descriptive Flexfield icon. This field is defined by the rectangular brackets [ ] at the top.
Alternatively, press the Tab key to display the descriptive flexfield.

54. You will be prompted to enter the following customer selections:


− Car Age = 2.0
− Car Option = Business
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
55. (B) OK.
l & On
56. (B) Apply.
n a e
t e r U s
The Pricing Engine calculation should result in a price of $4140.00, calculated as (1*2*3*4),

n
or (1.5 * 2300 * 0.8 * 1.5) = $4140, where:
I

l e
1 = The numeric constant (1.5)

c
r a• 2 = The price of XX-Car from Price List 1 (2300)

O • 3 = The age factor of two years (0.8); and

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 62
• 4 = The option factor of Business (1.5)

However, if the outcome is not $4140, click Actions > View Adjustments to see if any
other modifier was automatically applied.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 63
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program

m y
d e
ca
e A
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program

c l
The Build Attribute Mapping Rules program will map attributes used in active pricing setups if

r a
the profile option QP: Build Attributes Mapping Options is set to Map attributes used in active
pricing setup. If the value is set to Map all attributes, then attributes in both active and inactive
setups will be mapped.
O ly
l & On
The program Build Attribute Mapping Rules dynamically generates the package
QP_BUILD_SOURCING_PVT, which contains attribute mapping calls to build attribute
a e
mapping rules for Attributes. The package QP_BUILD_SOURCING_PVT is generated when
n
t e r s
the concurrent program is run. This package contains only the rules of used attributes
(Qualifiers/Pricing Attributes used in any pricing setup) that can be mapped at run-time. This
U
I n
means anytime you use a new attribute (one that has not been used by any other modifier, price
list, formula), you will need to run the program Build Attribute Mapping Rules accessible in

c l e
the Oracle Pricing Manager Responsibility or from the Tools Menu of the Attribute Linking
and Mapping windows. Also anytime you change any attribute mapping rules you will need to

r a
run this program.
The program generates the attribute mapping rules for all the attributes that have the Attribute

O Mapping Enabled box selected. When the Build Attribute Mapping Rules program runs

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 64
successfully, the Attribute Mapping Status is selected for those attributes for which an attribute
mapping rule is generated.
The Build Attribute Mapping Rules reports back success or failure to the user. The Attribute
Mapping Status check box will be selected for those attributes that were successfully mapped.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 65
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program Checklist

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 66
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program Checklist

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 67
Overview of Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE)

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE)

c l
A Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE) is an ordering structure that has associated Request Types

r a
and Source Systems. Different applications may have different request structures when they
make requests to the pricing engine. For example, Istore and Order Management can be part of
O ly
the Order Fulfillment PTE because they are both Order Fulfillment systems and share the same
setup data

l & On
Only those contexts and attributes assigned to the current Pricing Transaction Entity will be

a e
available in the list of values (LOVs) on the setup forms. Likewise, querying up setup data

n
r
(Price list lines, Modifiers, Qualifiers, etc.) will cause the description to be shown only for

t e U s
those contexts and attributes that are assigned to the current Pricing Transaction Entity.
Therefore it is important to set this profile option to the right value before creating or querying

I n
any setup data in the Pricing Application.

e
Note: The QP: Pricing Transaction Entity profile option can be set at the site or application

l
level using the System Administrator responsibility. This profile option’s value indicates the
c
current Pricing Transaction Entity in use. The default value for this profile is Order

r a
Fulfillment. However, the value of this profile must be correctly set for applications that are

O different from Order Management. Therefore, for example, Logistics users must change this
profile to point to the Logistics PTE so that they can look at the attributes that are linked to the

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 68
Logistics PTE. This profile can be set at site or application level only and cannot be set at user
level.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 69
Seeded PTEs

m y
d e
ca
e A
Seeded PTEs

c l
View existing PTEs in the Pricing Transaction Entity – Source System and Request Types
window.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 70
Role of PTEs in Attribute Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
Role of PTEs in Attribute Management

c l
The Pricing Transaction Entity narrows the data the search engine reviews. The search engine

r a
examines only the setup data generated by the source systems defined for that Pricing
Transaction Entity. All applications belonging to the same pricing transaction entity have the
O ly
same set of attributes available to them. A same PTE ensures that the applications sharing the

& On
same data always give the same price for an item irrespective of the request type.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 71
Components of a Pricing Transaction Entity

m y
d e
ca
e A
Components of a Pricing Transaction Entity

c l
Each pricing transaction entity (PTE) consists of a group of applications with the same setup

r a
data and attributes. Its purpose is to reduce the volume of data the search engine evaluates.
Source System
O ly
The Source System is the application that captures the pricing setup data. The Application

l & On
Name is not the same as the Source System for an attribute. The Application Name is the name
of the application that created the attribute. Typically, the application that would create an

n a e
attribute after attribute manager is installed are Marketing, Order Capture, Contracts Core, and
Advanced Pricing.

t e r U s
Although source systems also use valid applications as their values, source systems act as

I n
pricing related data repositories for various pricing transaction entities and should not be
confused with application names, even if they have matching names and same valid values.

l e
All source systems belonging to the same PTE will return the same price and adjustments for

c
all request types.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 72
Request Type
The Request Type identifies the type of transaction that is being priced. Different applications
make requests to the pricing engine. Request types of these applications may be different.
Some applications may share their request types.
For example: iStore and Order Capture share the same request type. On the other hand, Order
Management and iStore have different request structures.
Advanced Pricing provides seeded Pricing Transaction Entities (PTEs); however, you can
define additional PTEs.
Example: Order Fulfillment PTE
In the example above, the Pricing Transaction Entity is Order Fulfillment. Within this PTE,
there are several source systems. Istore, Order Capture, and Order Management will be
evaluating pricing data defined in all these source systems.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 73
Source Systems

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 74
Seeded Source Systems

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 75
Functional Areas for Source System Region

m y
d e
ca
e A
Functional Areas for Source System Region

c l
Displays functional area and category set for a selected source system (in a PTE). Each PTE

r a
must have at least one enabled functional area and related category set. You can use the
category set and its related hierarchy of categories to define price list lines or modifiers.
O ly
For example, the functional area of Order Management has a category set of inventory items,

l & On
so you could either define a modifier at the category set level or for a category within the
category set. Other examples of category sets include Inventory for Oracle Inventory, and the

a e
category set Purchasing for Oracle Purchasing (these products must be installed for their
n
t e r
category sets to be available).

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 76
Request Types

m y
d e
ca
e A
Request Types

c l
A request type identifies the type of transaction that is being priced. For example, Oracle Order

r a
Management is a request type that requests a price from the pricing application (the source).

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 77
Request Type and PTE Parameters

m y
d e
ca
e A
Request Type and PTE Parameters

c l
Pricing parameters provide controls for pricing applications. Unlike profile options, which can

r a
be set at the site, application, responsibility, and user levels, parameter values are set at Pricing
Transaction Entity (PTE) or Request Type level.
O ly
Pricing parameters provide flexibility in situations where the parameter value needs to be

& On
different for different Request Types.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 78
Creating a New Pricing Transaction Entity

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating a New Pricing Transaction Entity

c l
How do I know if I need to define a new Pricing Transaction Entity? When a new request type

r a
is created so that a new ordering structure is developed, the business must decide if the request
type will use the same set of pricing data (the same source systems) in the existing Pricing
O ly
Transaction Entity. A new Pricing Transaction Entity needs to be created only if the new

l & On
request type uses a different ordering structure AND a different set of source systems. Request
types also have to be unique across Pricing Transaction Entity.

a e
To create a new Pricing Transaction Entity:
n
t e r U s
1. Navigate to the Pricing Lookups window.
2. Query on QP_PTE_TYPE as lookup type.

I n
3. Enter a code (short name) for a Pricing Transaction Entity.
4. Enter Meaning.

l e
5. Enter a Description.
c
r a
6. Enter optional fields.
7. Save the record.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 79
The Pricing Transaction Entity that you created must also be attached to a new Request Type.
Unless you do not have a new Request type, you cannot attach Attribute Mapping rules to that
Pricing Transaction Entity. In other words, a Pricing Transaction Entity without Request type
cannot be attribute mapped, because of the absence of Request types.
Note: This is not applicable to Basic Pricing where the Pricing Transaction Entity you just
created displays in the Pricing Transaction Entity LOV, as Attribute Mapping method is ‘User
Entered’ whenever new PTE-Attributes links are created.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 80
Defining Pricing Transaction Entity Associations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Defining Pricing Transaction Entity Associations
Define the request types and source system for a given Pricing Transaction Entity in the

r a
Pricing Transaction Entity - Source System and Request Types window.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 81
QP: Source System Code

m y
d e
ca
e A
QP: Source System Code
Default value: Blank
c l
r a
This profile option is used in all pricing setup windows to identify the application through

O ly
which the pricing information is being entered. This source system code is held on all price and
modifier lists to identify the origin of the data. During pricing, the pricing engine may restrict

l & On
its search to pricing information which originated from a particular application depending on
the request type to source system setup.

n a e
By default, the value of the profile option QP_SOURCE_SYSTEM_CODE is QP (Oracle

t e r U s
Pricing) at the Site level. However, to differentiate between applications and prevent update of
modifiers among several applications, the value of this profile can be set up at the Application
level.
I n
If modifiers are created in different applications such as Oracle Advanced Pricing, Order

l e
Management, or Trade Management, then changes to the modifier can only be made in the

c
application where the modifier was originally created. These changes include changes to the

r a
modifier header (as deleting is already prevented) or changes such as inserting, updating, or
deleting modifier lines, pricing attributes, and qualifiers.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 82
If you do not want to differentiate between applications or prevent update of modifiers created
by different applications, then no specific setup is required. In this case, all modifiers are
created with same value for source system code (assuming the value of this profile is set only
at site level by default or same value if set for all applications which create modifiers).

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 83
QP: Source System Code

m y
d e
ca
e A
QP: Source System Code (continued)
Example
c l
r a
The following customer requirements need to be considered when setting up the profile
options:
O ly
• Modifiers created by the Trade Management application can only be changed by Trade
Management.
l & On
n a e
• Modifiers created by Oracle Pricing and Order Management applications can be
interchangeably updated but not by other applications.

t e r U s
• All other applications can update the modifiers of other applications except Trade
Management, Oracle Pricing and Order Management.

I n
To accommodate these requirements, the value of the profile QP_SOURCE_SYSTEM_CODE
is set up as follows:

l e
• Site level: QP (default)
c
r a
• Trade Management: XXX
• Oracle Pricing: YYY

O • Order Management: YYY (same as Oracle Pricing)

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 84
The default value should only be changed if the source of the pricing data is any application
other than Oracle Advanced Pricing. Set this to the source system lookup code of the
application that is interfacing the pricing data.
After Attribute Mapping Manger is installed, this profile can be set at Site, Application and
User level. The default value for this profile at the time of installation at the Site level is Oracle
Pricing. The seeded value of this profile for various applications is shown in the table below:
Application Name Default Value
Site Level Profile Value Oracle Pricing (QP)
Oracle Transportation (FTE) Oracle Transportation (FTE)
Oracle Inventory (INV) Oracle Inventory (INV)
Oracle Marketing (AMS) Oracle Marketing (AMS)
All other Applications Defaulted from Site
Note: Set the QP: Source System Code Profile to the source system lookup code of the
application from which the QP Setup or other application setup windows are called.
Values
QP: Oracle Pricing (and other source system lookup codes of related applications). This profile
option can be updated at the site and responsibility levels.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 85
QP: Source System Code Example

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 86
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 87
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Attribute Management
Chapter 8 - Page 88
Pricing Security

y
Chapter 9

em
a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 2
Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 4
Overview of Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of Pricing Security

c l
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides centralized control for pricing entity data security and the

r a
flexibility to enforce pricing security policy of an entire business enterprise.

O ly
This lesson explains how Oracle Advanced Pricing provides data security at the price list and
modifier levels. Pricing security is very useful for users with a single installation of Oracle

l & On
Applications and whose business process dictates a level of pricing security across
organizations. You can secure access to pricing data and pricing related order data so that

a e
pricing users can only access the information that is relevant to them.
n
t e r U s
Without pricing security, pricing entities can be used across all operating units when pricing
orders. This may present a problem to some users with a single installation of Oracle

n
Applications whose business process requires a level of security across organizations.

I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 5
Overview of Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of Pricing Security (continued)

c l
Use the Oracle Pricing Administrator responsibility to set up pricing security control in the

r a
HTML user interface. Pricing security secures access to pricing and pricing-related order data
so users can only access the information that is relevant to them. Actions such as updating and
O ly
viewing pricing entities is permitted only to users having the appropriate authority granted by
the Pricing Administrator.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 6
Oracle Pricing Administrator

m y
d e
ca
e A
Oracle Pricing Administrator

c l
The Oracle Pricing Administrator responsibility has full access to all the pricing entities across

r a
the installation. The Oracle Pricing Administrator can assign ownership of existing pricing
entities to a specific operating unit or assign global access so entities can be used by all
O ly
operating units when pricing orders (Global access).

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 7
Levels of Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
Levels of Pricing Security

c l
Currently, users with the Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility, have functional security

r a
access to view, create, and update pricing entities and complete all functions available in
Oracle Pricing Manager. Their access is not restricted; however, they cannot update pricing
O ly
entities created by users with the second security level (PTE plus Source System Code
Security).

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 8
Levels of Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
Levels of Pricing Security (continued)

c l
You can use pricing security to enforce the pricing security policy of an entire business

r a
enterprise by controlling both pricing setup and pricing execution security requirements.
Pricing security enables you to secure users' access to pricing data and pricing related order
O ly
data so that only the users with the appropriate access level privilege can update and view the
pricing entities.

l & On
Pricing security is a higher level that sits on top of functional security and PTE + Source

a e
System Code based on the security rules granted by the Oracle Pricing Administrator. Users'
n
t e r U s
access to pricing functions is restricted by the access roles granted to them.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 9
Functional Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 10
PTE + Source System Code level Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
PTE + Source System Code level Security

c l
Some pricing entities are created through integration with other applications that create their

r a
own price lists etc. in the Advanced Pricing windows such as Trade Management or Inventory.
Functional security is only limited by the added security provided by Pricing Transaction
O ly
Entity (PTE) plus Source System Code. This provides a higher security level than functional

source system code.


l & On
security. With this level, you can update (maintain) only those pricing entities that match your

a e
Functional security users have only view access to the pricing entities created by another
n
source system.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 11
Setting up Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 12
Step 1: Mapping Security Requirements

m y
d e
ca
e A
Step 1: Mapping Security Requirements

c l
Completely map all pricing security requirements for the entire installation: list all price lists,

r a
modifiers, and pricing agreements (the "pricing entities") with header details
Operating Units
O ly
• Decide which pricing entities belong to which Operating Unit

l & On
• Decide which pricing entities are to be used across all Operating Units

a e
• Decide which pricing entities are to be restricted to one Operating Unit

n
t e r
• Identify all Operating Units
s
• Identify all Responsibilities that have or will have access to pricing entities
U
I n
• Identify all pricing users with Functional Access to Advanced Pricing Menu
All pricing entities are first identified and then mapped to different grantee types according to

l e
the requirements. For example, a pricing agreement can be mapped to an operating unit so only

c
the users of that operating unit can view and update the pricing agreement.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 13
Step 2: Assigning Existing Pricing Entities to Operating Units
(Entity Usage)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Step 2: Assigning Existing Pricing Entities to Operating Units (Entity Usage)

r a
The Global check box is selected for all existing price lists and modifiers which enables all

O ly
Operating Units to use the price list and modifiers. (This provides current existing functionality
to all customers.) You can use the pricing security feature to restrict the pricing entities

& On
(pricelist/modifiers) to a specific Operating Unit (OU).
l
n a e
Once you decide to use security to restrict their price list and modifiers to a specific OU, you
will need to change the Global check box to No and update the OU information associated to

t e r U s
the price list and modifier using pricing security. You can deselect the Global check box on the
price list window one by one, or alternatively, use the Bulk Update feature in pricing security

n
to make changes to multiple entities.
I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 14
Practice - Assigning an Existing Price List to an Operating Unit
(Entity Usage)
Overview
In this practice you will assign ownership of a price list (the pricing entity) to an operating unit.
This restricts the usage of the price list to the assigned operating unit, and prevents its use across
multiple operating units.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Administrator, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Administrator, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Entity Usage page.


m y
2. Search for price list: XX-Price List 1.
d e
3. Select the price list and assign the following operating unit:
ca
− Owned by Operating Unit = Vision Operations

e A
4. Save your work.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 15
Solution - Assigning an Existing Price List to an Operating Unit
(Entity Usage)
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Administrator, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Entity Usage page.

• (N) Oracle Pricing Administrator > Security > Entity Usage

Searching for the Price List

2. In the Search field, select:


− Entity Type = Standard Pricelist
− Entity Name = XX-Price List 1

3. (B) Go.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
4.
n
In Entity Usage page:

I
− Global Usage = No

c l e
− Owned by Operating Unit = Vision Operations

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 16
5. (B) Apply.

6. Save your changes.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 17
Step 3: Creating Privileges for Existing Pricing Entities

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Step 3: Creating Privileges for Existing Pricing Entities
Security privileges determine whether the user can view or maintain the selected pricing entity.

r a
Users with view or maintain access can select the pricing entity in the search list of values
(LOV), otherwise, it will not be listed. The user can select the pricing entity from the LOV,
O ly
then the selected pricing entity will be displayed in view-only mode or updatable-mode based
on security privileges.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 18
Practice - Creating a Privilege
Overview
In this practice, you will search for the privileges currently assigned to a price list, and then
assign ownership of a price list (the pricing entity) to Global usage and provide maintain access.

Assumptions
• Oracle Pricing Administrator, Vision Operations responsibility

• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks
Searching for the Pricing Entity

1. Navigate to the Privileges page.

2. Search for the privileges associated with price list named XX-Price List 1.
m y
3. Click Go to view the privileges.
d e
Creating a Privilege (Using Express Create Privilege)
ca
4. Click Express Create Privilege.
e A
c l
Note: The Bulk Create Privileges is used to create privileges for multiple entities.

5. Select the following:


r a
• O ly
& On
Entity Type: Standard Pricelist = XX-Price List 1

l
• Grantee Type = Global

n a e

r
Access Level = Maintain

t e U s

n
Specify Duration: Start Date = Current Date
I
6.
e
Click Apply.

c l
7.

r a Save your work.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 19
Solution - Creating a Privilege
Searching for the Pricing Entity

Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Administrator, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Privileges page.

• (N) Oracle Pricing Administrator > Security > Privileges

2. Search region:
− Entity Type = Standard Pricelist
− Entity Name = XX-Price List 1

3. (B) Go.

Creating a Privilege (Using Express Create Privilege)

4. (B) Express Create Privilege.

5. Select Security Entity


− Entity Type = Standard Pricelist
− Entity Name = XX-Price List 1
m y
− Grantee Type = Global
− Access Level = Maintain
d e
− Start Date = Current date
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 20
m y
d e
6. (B) Apply. ca
e A
7. Save your work.

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 21
Step 4: Setting Security Profile Options to Define Defaulting
Security Rules

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Step 4: Setting Security Profile Options to Define Defaulting Security Rules

r a
The following security profile options provide default security settings for new pricing entities

O ly
but do not change the behavior of existing pricing entities.
• QP: Security Default ViewOnly Privilege: Controls the default view-only privileges for
& On
NEWLY CREATED price lists and modifiers. View and maintain responsibilities are
l
n a e
controlled separately by different profile options. This profile option enables you to set
view-only privileges at one of the following levels: Global (Default), Operating Unit,

t e r
price lists and modifiers.
U s
Responsibility, User, or None. This controls which users (if any) can view newly-created

I n
• QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege: Controls the default maintain privileges for
NEWLY CREATED price lists and modifiers. For example, if the profile option is set to

l e
Operating Unit, then the maintain privileges for that price list or modifier are restricted to

c
the pricing users of the operating unit where the price list or modifier was created. This

r a profile option enables you to set maintain privileges at one of the following levels: Global
(Default), Operating Unit, Responsibility, User, or None.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 22
Practice - Setting up Default Security Profile Options
Overview
In this practice you will set profile options that control the default security settings for newly-
created pricing entities such as price lists and modifiers. You can set up the default view and
maintain privileges for pricing entities at the following levels:

• Global

• None

• Operating Unit

• Responsibility

• User

Note: The profile settings will not change the security settings for existing pricing entities, only
for new pricing entities that you create.

Assumptions
• System Administrator, Vision Operations responsibility
m y
• Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.
d e

ca
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

e A
Tasks
c l
r a
Responsibility = System Administrator, Vision Operations

1. O ly
Navigate to the System Profile Values window.

2.
l & On
Search for the profile option QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege.

n a e
3.

4.
t e r
Select Global. This provides global maintain privileges across operating units.

U s
Select Global for the profile option QP: Security Default ViewOnly. This provides global

I n
view privileges across operating units.

5.
l e
Search for the QP: Security Control profile option to view current security setting for your

c
installation.

r
6. a Save your work

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 23
Solution - Setting up Default Security Profile Options
Responsibility = System Administrator, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the System Profile Values window.

• (N) System Administrator > Profile > System

2. In the Find System Profile Values, enter the following search criteria to display the pricing
profile options:

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
& On
The System Profile Values window displays.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 24
Setting up the Default Maintain Privileges

3. Select the profile option QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege:


− Site = Global
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
4. (B) OK.
t e r U s
I n
Setting up the Default View Privileges

5.
c l e
Select the profile option QP: Security Default ViewOnly.

r
6. a Select Global.

O7. (B) OK.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 25
Viewing Current Security Setting for your Installation

8. View the profile option QP: Security Control.. Note that Site = ON meaning that security is
installed.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 26
Security Implementation Steps – Before Turning Security On

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Security Implementation Steps – Before Turning Security On
You must create privileges before setting the concurrent program QP: Security Control with

r a
Views Conversion to ON. Otherwise, users cannot query any price lists or modifiers in the user
interface.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 27
Security Implementation Steps – Before Turning Security On

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Security Implementation Steps – Before Turning Security On
Before turning the concurrent program QP: Security Control with Views Conversion on, you

r a
must ensure that the following steps have been completed:

O ly
• Security requirements have been mapped.
• An operating unit owner has been assigned to existing pricing entities.

l
• Privileges have been granted.
& On
a e
If these steps are not completed, then users may not be able to use any pricing entities.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 28
Step 5: Turning Security On

m y
d e
ca
e A
Step 5: Turning Security On

c l
The concurrent program QP: Security Control with Views Conversion turns pricing security on

r a
or off for your entire installation. Ensure that you have completed the preceding setup and
implementation steps before turning on pricing security otherwise users will not be able to use
any pricing entities.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 29
Step 6: Confirm Security Settings

m y
d e
ca
e A
Step 6: Confirm Security Settings

c l
The profile option QP: Security Control (read-only) displays the current setting (either on or

r a
off) of the security option for your entire installation. This profile option value cannot be
directly updated and can only be turned on using the concurrent program Security Control.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 30
Security for Operating Units

m y
d e
ca
e A
Security for Operating Units

c l
Use the Entity Usage page to assign or reassign an operating unit to a pricing entity to provide

r a
a level of security across organizations.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 31
Entity Usage

m y
d e
ca
e A
Entity Usage

c l
Grants an entity’s usage to one operating unit (when Owned by Operating Unit is selected) or

r a
all operating units (when Global Usage is selected) so the entity can be used during pricing
engine calls. When Owned by Operating Unit is selected as the level of security, the creating
O ly
organization is the owner of the entity and it cannot be used across operating units without
specific permission.

l & On
The pricing security feature adds the Owned by Operating Unit information to newly-created

a e
pricing entities of price list and modifiers. At run-time, when the pricing engine is called, the
n
t e r s
engine returns the price lists and modifiers owned by the operating unit making the request and
the pricing entities with Global entity usage selected.
U
I n
A Global check box in the header of the price list and modifier windows (which is selected by
default), means that the new entity can be used across all operating units for pricing orders. If

c l e
the user who created the pricing entity deselects the Global box in the price list or modifier
header, then that entity’s usage is restricted to the operating unit of that user.

r a
Note: The default maintain privileges granted to the operating unit and to users are determined
by the default settings of the profile option QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 32
Owned by Operating Unit

m y
d e
ca
e A
Owned by Operating Unit

c l
Allows the granting to one or more operating units, the ability to use a specific pricing entity

r a
when making calls or processing orders. With this level of security, the creating organization is
the owner of the entity and it cannot be used across operating units without specific
permission.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 33
Global Usage

m y
d e
ca
e A
Global Usage

c l
When creating a pricing entity, you can clear or select the Global check box on the entity

r a
header to establish global usage. The Oracle Pricing Administrator can update these settings.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 34
Creating Privileges

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating Privileges

c l
Privileges enable you to restrict pricing data to only those user(s) for whom the data is

r a
relevant; for example, restricting one operating unit from viewing and using the pricing data of
another operating unit.
O ly
There may be geographical reasons or business reasons for keeping specific customer pricing

l & On
data from being seen by users who deal with a competing customer. In a large global
installation, or within a specific operating unit, a business may have customers who require

a e
that their data not be visible to sales managers and others who also call on their competitor. No
n
support those rules.
t e r U s
matter the circumstance, a security rule can be defined and access privileges restricted to

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 35
Privileges: Grantee Types/Grantees

m y
d e
ca
e A
Privileges: Grantee Types/Grantees
Examples:
c l
r a
• Pricing Analyst--UK responsibility has maintain access to price lists but Pricing Analyst--
USA does not
O ly
• Organization: Price List related to OU1 (operating unit 1) cannot be viewed or maintained
by OU2
l & On
n a e
• User level: Price List “Corporate” can only be accessed by User “JSMITH” or
Responsibility “Pricing Manager”

t e r U s
Provides flexibility to enforce pricing security policy of an entire business enterprise. Provide
vast variety of solutions required by operating units. This feature allows restrictions of pricing

I n
data to only those users for whom the data is relevant.
• There are instances where one operating unit may not be allowed to see and or use the

l e
pricing information of another operating unit.
c
r a
• There may be geographical or business reasons for keeping specific customer pricing data
from being seen by users who deal with a competing customer.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 36
• In a large global installation, or within a specific operating unit, a business may have a
customer(s) who require that their data not be visible to sales managers and others who
also call on their competitor.
In most circumstances, a security rule can be defined and access privileges restricted to support
those rules.
Note: If you do not want a grantee to have a particular access, ensure that no privilege has been
defined for the grantee.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 37
Privileges: Grantee Types/Grantees

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 38
Privileges: Access Level

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 39
Privileges

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 40
Changing the Access Privileges

m y
d e
ca
e A
Changing the Access Privileges

c l
The following security profile options provide the default values for newly-created pricing

r a
entities (not for entities that already have been created):

O ly
• QP: Security Default ViewOnly Privilege: This profile option enables you to set the view-
only privileges at one of the following grantee levels: Global (Default), Operating Unit,

price lists and modifiers.


l & On
Responsibility, User, or None. This controls which users (if any) can view newly-created

n a e
• QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege: For example, if the profile option is set to

t e r U s
Operating Unit, then the maintain privileges for that price list or modifier are restricted to
the pricing users of the operating unit where the price list or modifier was created. This

I n
profile option enables you to set maintain privileges at one of the following levels: Global
(Default), Operating Unit, Responsibility, User, or None.

l e
• For existing pricing entities, use the Privileges window to change the access privileges

c
because the two profiles--QP: Security Default ViewOnly Privilege and QP: Security

r a Default Maintain Privilege--have no effect on the behavior of existing pricing entities. If


more than one privilege is related to the same entity, then a user who is granted Maintain

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 41
privilege to a pricing entity will have that privilege even if the entity has a different
privilege granted at a different level.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 42
Entity Sets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Entity Sets

c l
Create a pricing entity set (use common selected qualifying criteria to create an entity set) so

r a
you can grant privileges with Maintain or ViewOnly access levels to the entire set.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 43
After the Security Upgrade: Impact of Changes

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
After the Security Upgrade: Impact of Changes
• Changes to existing pricing windows: When pricing security is turned on, a Global check

r a
box is added to selected pricing windows (such as price lists) to identify if the pricing
entity is available across all operating units when pricing orders.
O ly
• Changes to price lists: A price list with the Global check box selected is accessible to all

l & On
operating units, even though it may be assigned to a specific operating unit. If a price list
is copied, it is assigned the default privileges from the pricing security options.

n a e
• Changes to Modifier windows: A modifier with Global Usage assigned to it is accessible

t e r U s
to all operating units, even though it may be assigned to a specific operating unit. After
pricing security is turned on, the default view and update properties for modifiers are

n
determined by the pricing security profile options.

I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 44
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access
Control

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access Control

r a
Oracle Advanced Pricing can be used when multi-organization access control (MOAC) is

O ly
installed. Note: The terms multi-org access control and MOAC refer to multi-organization
access control. Pricing security works with MOAC to enable users to create pricing data for

& On
multiple operating units from a single responsibility.
l
n a e
Oracle Applications provides multi-org access control (MOAC) that enable you to assign
operating units to a security profile and then assign the security profile to responsibilities or

t e r U s
users. If multiple operating units are assigned to the security profile, then a user can access data
for multiple operating units from a single responsibility. This enables users to access, process,

I n
and report on data only for the operating units that they can access. Oracle Advanced Pricing
checks for multi-org access privileges and enables users to create pricing data for multiple

l e
operating units from this single responsibility. This is implemented using the pricing security
feature.
c
a
For more information, see Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Implementation Guide.
r
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 45
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access
Control (MOAC)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Overview of Pricing Security with Multi-Organization Access Control (continued)

r a
Using multi-org access control, each application responsibility can access multiple operating

O ly
units. The company can create a single EMEA responsibility for all three operating units and
users would only have to log in once to perform pricing tasks such as creating price lists or
creating modifiers.
l & On
n a e
Without multi-org access control, each application responsibility can access only one operating
unit; therefore, users who have to manage multiple operating units would need to log in and log

t e r U s
out of multiple responsibilities to do their tasks.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 46
Benefits of Using Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Benefits of Using Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security
You can easily switch access from one operating unit to another from a single pricing

r a
responsibility. This increases efficiency at shared service centers because pricing managers can
process pricing setups faster for multiple operating units.
O ly
By viewing data from multiple operating units from a single responsibility, users have more

l & On
information that enable them to make better decisions.
In Oracle Advanced Pricing, users can check price list and discount/promotion setups in

n a e
different operating units (OUs) and check or compare pricing trends from each OU. Example:

t e r U s
Query prices for Item A, retrieve prices on price lists belonging to different operating units and
check for pricing deviations. So now you can easily identify that the price for item A in EMEA

n
Operating Unit is much lower than price for same item in North America Operating Unit.

I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 47
Prerequisites for Enabling Multi-Org Access Control

m y
d e
ca
e A
1. Set up Multi-Org Access Control.
c l
Prerequisites for Enabling Multi-Org Access Control

r a
2. Run Security Control Concurrent Program: This program turns ON pricing security which

O ly
is required to create operating-unit specific pricing data.
If Pricing Security is OFF, all pricing setups are created as Global. The Global check box and

& On
Operating Unit fields are not visible on pricing windows.
l
n a e
Note: Before running this program, ensure that you have completed all security setup and
implementation steps. For example, privileges must be assigned to all existing price lists and

t e r U s
modifiers before turning on security, otherwise this data will not be visible.
For more information on setting up multi-org access control, see Oracle Applications Multiple

I n
Organizations Implementation Guide, and the Multi-Org Access TOI information.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 48
Setting Up Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Setting Up Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security
Here is the simplified flow for creating operating unit-specific pricing data:

r a
1. Log into a pricing responsibility.

O ly
2. Open a pricing entity like a price list or a modifier list.
3. Determine if pricing security is turned ON; if security is on, then the system

l & On
automatically checks for multi-org access privilege to validate which operating units this

n a e
responsibility can access.
4. If multi-org access privilege is enabled, create pricing setups for any of the multiple

t e r U s
operating units that the responsibility has permission to access.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 49
Multi-Org Process: Creating a Price List or Modifier

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Process: Creating a Price List or Modifier
You can select a global price list for pricing transactions originating from any operating unit.

r a
Global modifiers are evaluated by pricing engine for all pricing transactions, regardless of the

O ly
operating unit assigned on the transaction.
Price lists or modifiers that are not global can be assigned to only one operating unit (OU):

l & On
• If multi-org access is not enabled, this operating unit would default to MO: Operating Unit
and cannot be updated.

n a e
• If multi-org access is enabled, the operating unit defaults to MO: Default Operating Unit

t e r U s
and users additionally have the option to update or select operating unit from a list that the
responsibility has access to. (This is depicted in the flow diagram above).

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 50
Controlling Access by Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
Controlling Access by Pricing Security

c l
You can also remove maintain or view privileges. Although multi-org privileges enables

r a
access, a responsibility may not be able to edit or view all pricing data for the operating units
that they have access to without the required pricing security privileges.
O ly
Pricing administrators need to be aware of this system behavior and grant privileges carefully.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 51
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Pricing Security
Administrator

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 52
Example of Controlling Operating Unit Access by Pricing Security

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Example of Controlling Operating Unit Access by Pricing Security
Maintain or View access to pricing data is controlled by pricing security, and is not based on
multi-org access privileges.
r a
Example of Setups
O ly
• Responsibility A has access to OU1 and OU2

l & On
• Responsibility B has access to OU1 and OU3

a e
• Responsibilities A and B have a common Default Operating Unit

n
t e r
Profile MO: Default Operating Unit is OU1 for both responsibilities
s
Profile QP: Security Default Maintain Privilege is Operating Unit for both Responsibility A
U
n
and B
Scenario

e I
c l
Responsibility A creates Price List A for OU2 (note OU2 is not the default OU). Since security
privilege is created based on default OU so OU1 (default OU) has Maintain access on Price

r a
List A.
Responsibility B can also query/update Price List A, as it has the same default OU as OU on
O Maintain security privilege (OU1).

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 53
Therefore, this responsibility can access price list for an operating unit (OU2) that is not in its
multi-org access privileges. Similarly Responsibility A can access data for price lists in OU3
that were created by Responsibility B, again because this price list will be created with
Maintain privilege of same default OU (OU1).

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 54
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation
Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation Considerations

r a
Note: If each responsibility can access different Operating Units in their MO security profile,

O ly
this can result in users being able to access data for an operating unit that is not in their MO
security profile.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 55
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation
Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation Considerations
(continued)
r a
O ly
The Responsibility Pricing Manager, Global creates Price List A for EMEA operating unit
• Security privilege identifies default operating unit e.g US as operating unit that has
& On
Maintain privilege for this price list.
l
n a e
The Responsibility Pricing Manager, US can update Price List A even though the price list
belongs to EMEA OU (an OU this responsibility is not permitted to access).

e r s
• This is permissible because the US Pricing Manager has the same default OU (US) which

t U
has Maintain security privilege for Price List A.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 56
Multi-Org Access Control: Global Usage

m y
d e
ca
e A
Multi-Org Access Control: Global Usage

c l
Determine the level of usage for a pricing entity (price list or modifier):

r a
• By only 1 operating unit exclusively (Owned by Operating Unit), or

O ly
• Across all organizations (Global Usage)

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 57
Multi-Org Access Control: Secondary Price Lists

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 58
Multi-Org Access Control: Benefit Price List for Promotional
Goods

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control: Benefit Price List for Promotional Goods

r a
When selecting a secondary price list for a primary price list or a benefit price list for

O ly
promotional goods, the list of values is restricted by the Global check box or operating unit
assignment on the primary price list and the modifier respectively.

& On
This selection is also restricted by security privileges: for example, users can only select price
l
a e
lists for which they have View or Maintain access.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 59
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Cross-Order
Volume Report

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Process: Cross-Order Volume
Report
r a
O ly
The cross-order volume feature in pricing enables you to load volume data across sales orders
in a specified time period and use them as pricing and qualifier attributes in determining

& On
eligibility for future prices and price modifiers.
l
has access.
n a e
If MOAC is enabled, the report displays data from across operating units for which that user

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 60
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security: Implementation
Considerations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Implementation Considerations

r a
Review your item master setups before defining your pricing responsibilities.

O ly
Notes: Item Master for Advanced Pricing is specified in profile option QP: Item Validation
Org. Profile can be set only at site or responsibility level; cannot vary by the operating unit
selected on the pricing setup
l & On
Example

n a e
r
• Pricing Manager in OU1: Set up pricing rules for items in item master organization V1.

V1.
t e U s
• Pricing Manager in OU2: Set up pricing rules for items in same item master organization

I n
• Pricing Manager in OU3: Set up pricing rules for items in a different item master

c l e
organization V2.
• Profile QP: Item Validation Org set to Org V1 for responsibility Pricing Manager.

r a
One Pricing Manager responsibility can only access item org V1 therefore create MO Security
Profile only with operating units OU1 and OU2 as they share the item master. Create another
O Pricing Manager responsibility for OU3 and assign item org V2 to this responsibility.

Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 61
Copying Price Lists and Modifiers

m y
d e
ca
e A
Copying Price Lists and Modifiers

c l
Note: If the responsibility does not have access to an OU on the source price list or modifier

r a
(defined by the MO security profile), then the copied entity is granted the default access of
global.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 62
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Process:
Integrations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Multi-Org Access Control for Pricing Security Process: Integrations

r a
For example, if the sales agreement is for the operating unit OU1, any price list or modifier list

O ly
created from the sales agreement user interface will be assigned the same operating unit of
OU1.

& On
You will not be able to update the Global check box or operating unit for sales agreement-
l
a e
specific pricing setups from pricing windows.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 63
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Pricing Security
Chapter 9 - Page 64
Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 2
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 4
Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer

c l
Use the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window to:

r a
• Capture and display inputs and outputs of the pricing call (from applications like Oracle

O ly
Order Management, iStore, Order Capture, and Oracle Contracts Core)
• Diagnose which lines were selected or rejected by the pricing engine

l & On
• Analyze why certain prices and adjustments were or were not applied

n a e
The Pricing Engine Request Viewer window updates the display information each time the
pricing engine captures a new transaction so that the latest pricing request is displayed.

t e r U s
Previous pricing requests are saved in pricing tables.
Process for the Pricing Engine Request Viewer:

I n
The following actions occur when a pricing call is made:

l e
1. The calling application makes a call to the Build Attribute Mapping Rules package to

c
generate the attributes defined by the Attribute Mapping Function.

r a
2. The calling application then calls the pricing engine with the attributes generated by
attributes mapping.

O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 5
3. The pricing engine processes the request. Then searches for and evaluates eligible price
list and modifier lines.
4. If the profile option QP: Debug is set to Request Viewer On, then pricing engine inserts
records into the permanent pricing debug tables and generates a unique request ID, storing
the information from the calling application.
5. The pricing request information can then be viewed by querying the request in the Pricing
Engine Request Viewer from the OM Sales Order Pad or through the Pricing Manager
responsibility menu.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 6
Setting Profile Options for Pricing Engine Request Viewer

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Setting Profile Options for Pricing Engine Request Viewer
To turn on the Pricing Engine Request viewer, select Request Viewer On in the profile option

r a
QP: Debug. Alternatively, select Request Viewer Off to turn off the request viewer. This profile
option can be updated at the user level.
O ly
The pricing engine request viewer is only active for the transactions of the user who set this

Viewer Off.
l & On
profile option; other users' transactions are not affected. The default value is set to Request

n a e
When the QP: Debug profile option is set to Request Viewer On, but Debug Log is not visible

t e r U s
in Viewer, then the debug log text file will be created in the directory specified in the OM:
Debug Log Directory(/dbfiles/applcsf/log). Note: A text file is created even if the setting for

QP: Set Request Name


I n
the OM: Debug profile is null.

l e
Set the value of the profile option QP: Set Request Name to append the value of the profile

c
with Order ID to be stored in the Request Name field. The default value is Null.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 7
Pricing Engine Request Viewer

m y
d e
ca
e A
Pricing Engine Request Viewer

c l
Using the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window, you can do the following:

r a
• View the controls passed by the calling application to the pricing engine such as Events,

O ly
Rounding Flag, Search and Calculate Flag, GSA Flag.
• View price request line passed in by the calling application.

l & On
• View which modifier lines the pricing engine applied or rejected for benefit adjustments

n a e
along with the details of the modifier line.
• View the pricing, qualifiers, and product attributes passed to the pricing engine along with

t e r U s
the other data generated by the engine.
• View the relationship between order lines for promotional modifiers, price breaks, and

I n
service lines (OID, PRG, PBH, Service Items).

c l e
• View the formula step values generated by the pricing engine used in formula calculation.
• View and query fields in the Pricing Debug Log.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 8
Using the Pricing Engine Request Viewer

m y
d e
ca
e A
Using the Pricing Engine Request Viewer

c l
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager > Pricing Engine Request Viewer
From Order Management:
r a
O ly
Order Management Super User, Vision Operations Responsibility
(N) Order, Returns > Sales Orders (M) Tools > Pricing Engine Request Viewer

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 9
Pricing Engine Request Viewer Window

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Regions in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer Window
The Pricing Engine Request Viewer window consists of the Pricing Engine Requests window,

r a
Attributes window, Related Lines window, Formula Step Values window, and Debug Log
window.
O ly
The Pricing Engine Requests window consists of three regions: Requests region, Lines region
and Line Details region.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 10
Debug Log window

m y
d e
ca
e A
Debug Log window

c l
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager > Pricing Engine Request Viewer > (B) View Debug Log.
Maps to the qp_debug_text table.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 11
Diagnostics Concurrent Programs

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Advanced Pricing Diagnostics Concurrent Programs
These diagnostic programs are available as concurrent programs so you no longer need to run

r a
the scripts from the run from the operating system SQL*Plus prompt.

O ly
1. (N) Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility > Reports > Submit A New Request
2. (B) OK to display the Submit Request window.

l & On
3. Select the diagnostics program you want to run.

n a e
Alternatively, you can run the Diagnostics: List Line Details concurrent request program
directly from the price list and modifier setup windows by selecting Debug: Generate List Line
Details from the Tools menu.

t e r U s
Note: To select Debug: Generate List Line Details from the Tools menu, the profile option

I n
QP: Debug must be set to Request Viewer Off, Generate List Line Details for Debug.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 12
Diagnostics: Performance Analysis Concurrent Program

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Diagnostics: Performance Analysis Concurrent Program
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility > Reports > Diagnostics: Performance Analysis

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 13
Diagnostics: List Line Details Concurrent Program

m y
d e
ca
e A
Diagnostics: List Line Details Report

c l
Use this method to find out why a specific price list line or modifier line was not selected by

r a
the pricing engine. Run this concurrent program to display setup information about the
modifier or price list line.
O ly
Note: The List Line ID must be valid and existing in the database for this Concurrent Program
to run successfully.

l & On
From the Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility, navigate to Reports, submit a request for the

n a e
concurrent program Diagnostics: List Line Details, and enter the list line ID for the parameter

t e r U s
(the price list line ID/modifier line ID).
(N) Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility > Reports > Diagnostics: List Line Details

I n
Alternatively, you can run the concurrent request program directly from the price list and
modifier setup windows by selecting Debug: Generate List Line Details from the Tools menu.

l e
Note: To select Debug: Generate List Line Details from the Tools menu, the profile option
c
QP: Debug must be set to Request Viewer Off, Generate List Line Details for Debug.

r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 14
Pricing Engine Messages and Diagnosis

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 15
Oracle Advanced Pricing Diagnostics and Troubleshooting White
Paper

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Oracle Advanced Pricing Diagnostics and Troubleshooting White Paper

r a
The white paper provides information about the following common Oracle Advanced Pricing
setup issues:
O ly
• Multi-Org Access control for Pricing Security

l & On
• Support For Hierarchical Categories
• Price Book

n a e
• Pricing Parameters

t e
• Continuous Price Breaks r U s
n
• Support TCA Party Hierarchy
I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 16
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 17
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting


Chapter 10 - Page 18

Вам также может понравиться